Handleiding Toyota GT86 2017 (pagina 523 van 528) (Engels)

733716

523

Verklein

Vergroot

Pagina terug

1/528

Pagina verder

TABLE OF CONTENTS

86_EE (OM18089E)

Before driving

Adjusting and operating features such as door locks,

mirrors, and steering column.

When driving

Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.

Interior features

Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other in-

terior features for a comfortable driving experience.

Maintenance and

care

Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-

yourself maintenance, and maintenance information.

When trouble

arises

What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat

tire, or is involved in an accident.

Vehicle

specifications

Detailed vehicle information.

Index

Alphabetical listing of information contained in this man-

ual.

TABLE OF CONTENTS Index

86_EE (OM18089E)

1-1. Key information

Keys...................................... 32

1-2. Opening, closing and

locking the doors

and trunk

Smart entry &

start system ........................ 35

Wireless remote control ........ 62

Doors .................................... 77

Trunk..................................... 80

1-3. Adjustable components

(seats, mirrors,

steering wheel)

Front seats............................ 86

Rear seats ............................ 89

Head restraints ..................... 91

Seat belts.............................. 93

Steering wheel .................... 100

Anti-glare inside rear

view mirror ........................ 101

Outside rear

view mirrors ...................... 102

1-4. Opening and closing

the windows

Power windows................... 105

1-5. Refueling

Opening the fuel

tank cap ........................... 109

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer

system.............................. 113

Double locking system ....... 127

1-7. Safety information

Correct driving posture....... 129

SRS airbag

(Supplemental Restraint

System airbag)................. 131

Child restraint systems....... 161

Installing child restraints..... 170

Airbag manual

on-off system ................... 180

2-1. Driving procedures

Driving the vehicle.............. 184

Engine (ignition) switch

(vehicles with a smart

entry & start system) ........ 198

Engine (ignition) switch

(vehicles without a smart

entry & start system) ........ 207

Automatic transmission ...... 210

Manual Transmission ......... 217

Turn signal lever................. 221

Parking brake ..................... 222

Horn ................................... 223

Before driving

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

2-2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters ............ 224

Indicators and

warning lights.................... 228

Multi-information display

(monochrome display) ...... 234

Multi-information display

(color display) ................... 239

2-3. Operating the lights

and windshield wipers

Headlight switch.................. 255

Fog light switch ................... 261

Windshield wipers

and washer ....................... 262

2-4. Using other driving

systems

Cruise control...................... 265

Driving assist systems ........ 270

Hill-start assist control......... 277

2-5. Driving information

Cargo and luggage ............. 281

Winter driving tips ............... 283

Trailer towing ...................... 287

3-1. Using the air

conditioning system

and defogger

Manual air

conditioning system ......... 290

Automatic air

conditioning system ......... 298

Rear window and

outside rear view

mirror defoggers............... 306

3-2. Using the audio system

Using the AUX/

USB port .......................... 308

Steering wheel

audio switches ................. 309

3-3. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list ................. 310

• Interior light ...................... 311

3-4. Using the storage

features

List of storage features....... 312

• Glove box......................... 313

• Bottle holders ................... 314

• Cup holders/

console tray...................... 315

Interior features

TABLE OF CONTENTS Index

86_EE (OM18089E)

3-5. Other interior features

Sun visors ........................... 317

Vanity mirrors...................... 318

Clock................................... 319

Ashtray................................ 320

Power outlets ...................... 321

Seat heaters ....................... 323

Floor mat............................. 325

Trunk features..................... 328

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting

the vehicle exterior ........... 332

Cleaning and protecting

the vehicle interior ............ 336

Cleaning and protecting

the Alcantara

area .......... 340

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance

requirements..................... 342

4-3. Do-it-yourself

maintenance

Do-it-yourself service

precautions ...................... 345

Hood................................... 348

Positioning a floor jack ....... 350

Engine compartment .......... 352

Tires ................................... 365

Tire inflation pressure......... 376

Wheels ............................... 378

Air conditioning filter........... 381

Wireless remote control/

electronic key battery ....... 384

Checking and

replacing fuses................. 388

Light bulbs.......................... 396

5-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers ........... 408

If your vehicle needs

to be towed ...................... 409

If you think something

is wrong............................ 417

Fuel pump shut

off system......................... 418

Maintenance and care

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

5-2. Steps to take in

an emergency

If a warning light turns

on or a warning buzzer

sounds... .......................... 419

If a warning message is

displayed .......................... 428

If you have a flat tire

(vehicles with an

emergency tire puncture

repair kit)........................... 446

If you have a flat tire

(vehicles with a

spare tire) ......................... 462

If the engine will

not start............................. 474

If the shift lever cannot be

shifted from P ................... 477

If you lose your keys ........... 478

If the electronic key does

not operate properly ......... 479

If the battery is

discharged ........................ 483

If your vehicle

overheats.......................... 488

If the vehicle becomes

stuck ................................. 491

If your vehicle has to be

stopped in an

emergency........................ 493

6-1. Specifications

Maintenance data

(fuel, oil level, etc.) ........... 496

Fuel information ................. 509

6-2. Customization

Customizable features ....... 511

Abbreviation list......................... 514

Alphabetical index ..................... 515

What to do if... ........................... 525

Vehicle specifications

Index

Toyota Motor Europe NV/SA, Avenue du Bourget 60 - 1140 Brussels,

Belgium www.toyota-europe.com

86_EE (OM18089E)

Outside rear view mirrors

P. 102

Pictorial index

Exterior

Hood

P. 348

Windshield wipers

P. 262

Headlights

P. 255

Turn signal lights

P. 221

Front fog lights

P. 261

Front position lights/daytime running lights

P. 255

86_EE (OM18089E)

Tires

●Rotation

●Replacement

●Temporary repair

●Inflation pressure

P. 365

P. 462

P. 446

P. 376

Rear window defogger

P. 306

Trunk

P. 80

Doors

P. 77

Fuel filler door

P. 109

Tail lights

P. 255

License plate lights

P. 255

Turn signal lights

P. 221

Rear fog light

P. 261

86_EE (OM18089E)

Pictorial index

Interior

(Left-hand drive vehicles)

Power outlet

P. 321

Head restraints

P. 91

Seat belts

P. 93

SRS front passenger

airbag

P. 131

Cup holders

Console tray

P. 315

SRS side airbags

P. 131

Front seats

P. 86

Glove box

P. 313

SRS curtain shield

airbags

P. 131

Child restraint

anchor brackets

P. 170

86_EE (OM18089E)

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror

P. 101

Interior light

P. 311

Vanity mirrors

P. 318

Sun visors

P. 317

: NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat

protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or

SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. (P. 178)

86_EE (OM18089E)

Inside door lock buttons

P. 78

Outside rear view mirror switches

P. 102

Window lock switch

P. 105

Power window switches

P. 105

Door lock switch

P. 78

Pictorial index

Interior

(Left-hand drive vehicles)

86_EE (OM18089E)

: If equipped

Shift lever

P. 210, 217

Parking brake lever

P. 222

VSC/TRC off switch

P. 271

Seat heater switches



P. 323

“TRACK” switch

P. 272

Power outlet

P. 321

Shift lock override button



P. 477

Driving pattern selector switch



P. 212

86_EE (OM18089E)

Headlight switch

Turn signal lever

Fog light switch

P. 255

P. 221

P. 261

Gauges and meters

Multi-information display

P. 224

P. 234, 239

Clock

P. 319

Windshield wiper and washer switch/

headlight cleaners switch

P. 262

Emergency flasher

switch

P. 408

Tilt and telescopic steering

lock release lever

P. 100

Floor mat

P. 325

Hood lock release lever

P. 348

Fuel filler door opener

P. 109

SRS driver knee airbag

P. 131

Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles with a

smart entry & start system)

P. 198

AUX/USB port

P. 308

Pictorial index

Instrument panel

(Left-hand drive vehicles)

86_EE (OM18089E)

Vehicles with a manual air conditioning system

Air conditioning

system

P. 290

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers

switch

P. 306

Vehicles with an automatic air conditioning system

Rear window and outside rear view

mirror defoggers switch

P. 306

Air conditioning

system

P. 298

86_EE (OM18089E)

Paddle shift switches



P. 213, 215

Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles

without a smart entry & start

system)

P. 207

Cruise control switch



P. 265

Pictorial index

Instrument panel

(Left-hand drive vehicles)

Meter control switches



P. 240

Horn

SRS driver airbag

P. 223

P. 131

Audio remote control

switches



P. 309

86_EE (OM18089E)

Instrument panel light control dial

P. 226

Trunk opener

P. 80

Tire pressure

warning system

reset switch

P. 368

: If equipped

86_EE (OM18089E)

Pictorial index

Interior

(Right-hand drive vehicles)

SRS front passenger

airbag

P. 131

Head restraints

P. 91

Seat belts

P. 93

Child restraint anchor brackets

P. 170

Power outlet

P. 321

Glove box

P. 313

Front seats

P. 86

SRS side airbags

P. 131

Cup holders

Console tray

P. 315

SRS curtain shield

airbags

P. 131

86_EE (OM18089E)

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror

P. 101

Interior light

P. 311

Sun visors

P. 317

Vanity mirrors

P. 318

: NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat

protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or

SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. (P. 178)

86_EE (OM18089E)

Inside door lock buttons

P. 78

Outside rear view mirror switches

P. 102

Window lock switch

P. 105

Power window switches

P. 105

Door lock switch

P. 78

Pictorial index

Interior

(Right-hand drive vehicles)

86_EE (OM18089E)

Shift lock override button



P. 477

Shift lever

P. 210, 217

Parking brake lever

P. 222

VSC/TRC off switch

P. 271

Seat heater switches



P. 323

Driving pattern selector switch



P. 212

“TRACK” switch

P. 272

Power outlet

P. 321

: If equipped

86_EE (OM18089E)

Tilt and telescopic steering

lock release lever

P. 100

Gauges and meters

Multi-information display

P. 224

P. 234, 239

Clock

P. 319

Windshield wiper and

washer switch/

headlight cleaners switch

P. 262

Emergency flasher

switch

P. 408

Floor mat

P. 325

Hood lock release lever

P. 348

Fuel filler door opener

P. 109

Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles with a

smart entry & start system)

P. 198

SRS driver knee airbag

P. 131

Headlight switch

Turn signal lever

Fog light switch

P. 255

P. 221

P. 261

AUX/USB port

P. 308

Pictorial index

Instrument panel

(Right-hand drive vehicles)

86_EE (OM18089E)

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers

switch

P. 306

Vehicles with an automatic air conditioning system

Vehicles with a manual air conditioning system

Air conditioning

system

P. 290

Air conditioning

system

P. 298

Rear window and outside rear view

mirror defoggers switch

P. 306

86_EE (OM18089E)

Pictorial index

Instrument panel

(Right-hand drive vehicles)

Paddle shift switches



P. 213, 215

Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles

without a smart entry & start

system)

P. 207

Cruise control switch



P. 265

Meter control switches



P. 240

Horn

SRS driver airbag

P. 223

P. 131

Audio remote control

switches



P. 309

86_EE (OM18089E)

Instrument panel

light control dial

P. 226

Trunk opener

P. 80

: If equipped

Tire pressure warning system reset switch

P. 368

86_EE (OM18089E)

For your information

Main Owner’s Manual

Please note that this manual covers all models and all equipment, including

options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not

installed on your vehicle.

All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing.

However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we

reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ

from your vehicle in terms of color and equipment.

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota

A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota vehi-

cles are currently available in the market. Using these spare parts and

accessories which are not genuine Toyota products may adversely affect the

safety of your vehicle, even though these parts may be approved by certain

authorities in your country. Toyota Motor Corporation therefore cannot accept

any liability or guarantee spare parts and accessories which are not genuine

Toyota products, nor for replacement or installation involving such parts.

This vehicle should not be modified with non genuine Toyota products. Modi-

fication with non genuine Toyota products could affect its performance,

safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addi-

tion, damage or performance problem resulting from the modification may

not be covered under warranty.

86_EE (OM18089E)

Installation of an RF-transmitter system

The installation of an RF-transmitter system in your vehicle could affect elec-

tronic systems such as:

●Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system

●Cruise control system

●Anti-lock brake system

●SRS airbag system

●Seat belt pretensioner system

Be sure to check with any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional for precautionary measures or spe-

cial instructions regarding installation of an RF-transmitter system.

Further information regarding frequency bands, power levels, antenna posi-

tions and installation provisions for the installation of RF-transmitters, is

available on request at any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional.

86_EE (OM18089E)

Event data recorder

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main pur-

pose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations,

such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist

in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed

to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short

period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake

pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in

which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situ-

ation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-

tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are

recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine

the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired

during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access

to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,

other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can

read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

●Disclosure of the EDR data

Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except

when:

• An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle)

is obtained

• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a govern-

ment agency

• For use by Toyota in a law suit

However, if necessary, Toyota may:

• Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance

• Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing

information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner

86_EE (OM18089E)

Scrapping your Toyota

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain

explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt

pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be

sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner

removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional, before you scrap your vehicle.

WARNING

■General precautions while driving

Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influ-

ence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehi-

cle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and

reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in

death or serious injury.

Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other

drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.

Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that dis-

tracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or

reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you,

your occupants or others.

■General precaution regarding children’s safety

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to

have or use the key.

Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.

There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with

the windows or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or

extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

86_EE (OM18089E)

Your vehicle contains batteries and/or accumulators. Do not discard them into

the environment but cooperate with separate collection (Directive 2006/66/

EC).

86_EE (OM18089E)

Symbols used throughout this manual

Cautions & Notices

Symbols used in illustrations

WARNING

This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause death or

serious injury to people. You are informed about what you must or must not do

in order to reduce the risk of death or serious injury to yourself and others.

NOTICE

This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause damage to

the vehicle or its equipment. You are informed about what you must or must

not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Toyota and its

equipment.

Safety symbol

The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”, “Do

not do this”, or “Do not let this happen.”

Arrows indicating operations

Indicates the action (pushing, turning,

etc.) used to operate switches and

other devices.

Indicates the outcome of an operation

(e.g. a lid opens).

86_EE (OM18089E)

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

1-1. Key information

Keys.................................... 32

1-2. Opening, closing and

locking the doors

and trunk

Smart entry &

start system ...................... 35

Wireless remote control...... 62

Doors .................................. 77

Trunk .................................. 80

1-3. Adjustable components

(seats, mirrors,

steering wheel)

Front seats.......................... 86

Rear seats .......................... 89

Head restraints ................... 91

Seat belts............................ 93

Steering wheel.................. 100

Anti-glare inside rear

view mirror...................... 101

Outside rear

view mirrors .................... 102

1-4. Opening and closing

the windows

Power windows................. 105

1-5. Refueling

Opening the fuel

tank cap .......................... 109

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer

system ............................ 113

Double locking system...... 127

1-7. Safety information

Correct driving posture ..... 129

SRS airbag

(Supplemental Restraint

System airbag) ............... 131

Child restraint systems ..... 161

Installing child

restraints......................... 170

Airbag manual

on-off system .................. 180

86_EE (OM18089E)

1-1. Key information

Keys

The following keys are provided with the vehicle.

Vehicles without a smart entry & start system

Keys (with a wireless

remote control function)

Operating the wireless remote

control function (P. 62)

Key (without a wireless

remote control function)

Key number plate

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system

Electronic keys

• Operating the smart entry &

start system (P. 35)

• Operating the wireless

remote control function

(P. 6 2)

Mechanical keys

Key number plate

1-1. Key information

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Using the mechanical key (vehicles with a smart entry & start system)

To take out the mechanical key,

slide the release lever and take

the key out.

After using the mechanical key,

store it in the electronic key. Carry

the mechanical key together with

the electronic key. If the electronic

key battery is depleted or entry

function does not operate prop-

erly, you will need the mechanical

key. (P. 479)

■Key number plate

Keep the plate in a safe place, not in the vehicle. In the event that a key

(without a smart entry & start system) or mechanical key (with a smart entry

& start system) is lost, a new key can be made by any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional, using

the key number plate. (P. 478)

■When riding in an aircraft

When bringing a key with wireless remote control function onto an aircraft,

make sure you do not press any buttons on the key while inside the aircraft

cabin. If you are carrying the key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons

are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the

key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.

1-1. Key information

86_EE (OM18089E)

NOTICE

■To prevent key damage

Observe the following:

●Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.

●Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for a long period of time.

●Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.

●Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys

close to such materials.

●Do not disassemble the keys.

●Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the key.

●Vehicles with a smart entry & start system: Do not place the keys near

objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs, audio systems, induc-

tion cookers, or medical electrical equipment, such as low-frequency ther-

apy equipment.

■Carrying the electronic key on your person (vehicles with a smart entry

& start system)

Carry the electronic key 10 cm (3.9 in.) or more away from electric appli-

ances that are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances

within 10 cm (3.9 in.) of the electronic key may interfere with the key, causing

the key to not function properly.

■In case of a smart entry & start system malfunction or other key-related

problems (vehicles with a smart entry & start system)

Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle to

any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

■When a vehicle key is lost

If the key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit

any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional immediately with all remaining keys that was provided

with your vehicle.

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Smart entry & start system



The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the

electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket.

(The driver should always carry the electronic key.)

Unlocks and locks the doors (



P. 3 6 )

Unlocks the trunk (



P. 3 7 )

Starts the engine (



P. 198)

Electronic key



: If equipped

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

86_EE (OM18089E)

Unlocking and locking the doors

Vehicles without double lock-

ing system

Grip the handle to unlock the

doors.

Vehicles with double locking

system

Grip the driver’s door handle to

unlock the door. Grip the passen-

ger’s door handle to unlock all

the doors.

Make sure to touch the sensor on

the back of the handle.

The door cannot be unlocked for

3 seconds after the door is

locked.

Touch the lock sensor (the

indentation on the side of the

door handle) to lock the doors.

Check that the door is securely

locked.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Unlocking the trunk

Press the button to unlock the

trunk.

Antenna location and effective range

■Antenna location

Antennas outside the cabin

Antennas inside the cabin

Antenna outside the trunk

Antenna inside the trunk

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is

detected)

When locking or unlocking

the doors

The system can be operated

when the electronic key is

within about 0.4 - 0.8 m (1.3 -

2.6 ft.) of either of the outside

door handles. (Only the

doors detecting the key can

be operated.)

When unlocking the trunk

The system can be operated

when the electronic key is

within about 0.4 - 0.8 m (1.3 -

2.6 ft.) of the trunk release

button.

When starting the engine

or changing “ENGINE

START STOP” switch

modes

The system can be operated

when the electronic key is

inside the vehicle.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Operation signals

The emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/

unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)

■When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor

■Door lock buzzer

If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a

buzzer sounds continuously. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock

the vehicle once more.

■Alarms and warning indicators

A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning messages

shown on the multi-information display are used to prevent theft of the vehi-

cle and accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate mea-

sures in response to any warning message on the multi-information display.

(P. 430, 435)

The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures

when only alarms are sounded.

Use your palm to touch the lock sensor.

Alarm Situation Correction procedure

Exterior alarm

sounds once for

5 seconds

An attempt was made to

lock the vehicle while a

door was open.

Close all of the doors

and lock the doors

again.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Security feature

If a door is not opened within approximately 30 seconds after the vehicle is

unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again. (How-

ever, depending on the location of the electronic key, the key may be

detected as being in the vehicle. In this case, the vehicle may be unlocked.)

■Battery-saving function

The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the elec-

tronic key battery and the vehicle battery from being discharged while the

vehicle is not in operation for a long time.

●In the following situations, the smart entry & start system may take some

time to unlock the doors.

• The electronic key has been left in an area of approximately 2 m (6 ft.)

of the outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer.

• The smart entry & start system has not been used for 5 days or longer.

●If the smart entry & start system has not been used for 14 days or longer,

the doors cannot be unlocked at any doors except the driver’s door.

In this case, take hold of the driver’s door handle, or use the wireless

remote control or the mechanical key, to unlock the doors.

Alarm Situation Correction procedure

Interior alarm

sounds continu-

ously

The “ENGINE START

STOP” switch was turned

to ACCESSORY mode

while the driver’s door was

open (or the driver’s door

was opened while the

“ENGINE START STOP”

switch was in ACCES-

SORY mode).

Turn the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch

off and close the

driver’s door.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Conditions affecting operation

The smart entry & start system uses weak radio waves. In the following situ-

ations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may

be affected, preventing the smart entry & start system, wireless remote con-

trol and engine immobilizer system from operating properly.

(Way of coping P. 479)

●When the electronic key battery is depleted

●Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large dis-

play, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electri-

cal noise

●When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following

metallic objects

• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached

• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside

• Metallic wallets or bags

• Coins

• Hand warmers made of metal

• Media such as CDs and DVDs

●When other wireless key (that emit radio waves) is being used nearby

●When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that

emit radio waves

• A portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless com-

munication device

• Another vehicle's electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio

waves

• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)

• Digital audio players

• Portable game systems

●If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to

the rear window

●When the electronic key is placed near a battery charger or electronic

devices

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Notes for the entry function

●Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection

areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases:

• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle,

near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or

unlocked.

• The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to

the rear bumper center when the trunk is unlocked.

• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray or

floor, in the door pockets or glove box or auxiliary box when the engine

is started or “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes are changed.

●Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the

door pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave

reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin

and the door will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the

electronic key inside the vehicle.

●As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may

be locked or unlocked by anyone.

●Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to

start the engine if the electronic key is near the window.

●The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door

handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash when the electronic key is

within the effective range. (The door will automatically be locked after

approximately 30 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)

●Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.

●If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the elec-

tronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not

be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to

unlock the doors.)

●A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the

doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the

original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door

handle again.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Notes for locking the doors

●Touching the door lock sensor while wearing gloves may delay or prevent

lock operation. Remove the gloves and touch the lock sensor again.

●Vehicles without a double locking system: When the lock operation is

performed using the lock sensor, recognition signals will be shown up to

two consecutive times. After this, no recognition signals will be given.

●If the door handle becomes wet when washing the vehicle while the elec-

tronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock

repeatedly. In this case, place the electronic key in a location 2 m (6 ft.) or

more away from the vehicle (take care to ensure that the key is not sto-

len), and continue to wash the vehicle.

●If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet

during a car wash, a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the

alarm, lock all the doors.

●The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice,

snow, mud, etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again.

■Notes for the unlocking function

●A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the

doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the

original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door

handle again.

●Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.

Remove the gloves and touch the sensor on the back of the handle

again.

●If the door handle becomes wet when washing the vehicle while the elec-

tronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock

repeatedly. In this case, place the electronic key in a location 2 m (6 ft.) or

more away from the vehicle (take care to ensure that the key is not sto-

len), and continue to wash the vehicle.

●If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly

longer to unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

86_EE (OM18089E)

■When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods

●To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 2 m

(6 ft.) of the vehicle.

●The smart entry & start system can be deactivated in advance. (P. 5 11 )

■To operate the system properly

●Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not

get the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system

from the outside of the vehicle.

Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the

key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate prop-

erly. (The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention func-

tion may not operate.)

●Do not leave the electronic key inside the trunk.

The key confinement prevention function may not operate, depending on

the location of the key (close to a spare tire, the inside edge of the trunk),

conditions (inside a metal bag, close to metallic objects) and the radio

waves in the surrounding area. (P. 8 1 )

■If the smart entry & start system does not operate properly

●Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk: Use the mechani-

cal key. (P. 479)

●Starting the engine:P. 480

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Electronic key battery depletion

●The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.

●If the battery charge becomes low, a buzzer will sound in the cabin and a

message will be displayed on the multi-information display when the

engine is stopped. (P. 435)

●As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will

become depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following

symptoms indicate that the electronic key battery may be depleted.

Replace the battery when necessary. (P. 384)

• The smart entry & start system or the wireless remote control does not

operate.

• The detection area becomes smaller.

• The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.

●To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key close to

any of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:

•TVs

• Personal computers

• Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers

• Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones

• Induction cookers

• Table lamps

■When the electronic key battery is fully depleted

P. 384

■If the smart entry & start system has been deactivated in a customized

setting

●Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk: Use the wireless

remote control or mechanical key. (P. 62, 479)

●Starting the engine and changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch

modes: P. 480

●Stopping the engine: P. 482

■Customization that can be configured at any authorized Toyota dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional

Settings (e. g. smart entry & start system) can be changed.

(Customizable features: P. 5 11 )

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Certification for smart entry & start system

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

86_EE (OM18089E)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

-Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.

-Dispose of used batterites according to the local laws.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

86_EE (OM18089E)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

86_EE (OM18089E)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

86_EE (OM18089E)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

86_EE (OM18089E)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

86_EE (OM18089E)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

86_EE (OM18089E)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■Caution regarding interference with electronic devices

●People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization

therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should main-

tain a reasonable distance between themselves and the smart entry &

start system antennas. (P. 3 7 )

The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary,

the entry function can be disabled. Ask any authorized Toyota dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional for details,

such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of the emitted radio

waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry

function.

●User of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pace-

makers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable

cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for

information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.

Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such

medical devices.

Ask any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional for details for disabling the entry function.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

86_EE (OM18089E)

Wireless remote control

The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehi-

cle.

Vehicles without a smart entry & start system

Locks both side doors

Check that the door is securely

locked.

Locks driver’s door

Check that the door is securely

locked.

Unlocks both side doors

Pressing the button unlocks

the driver’s door. Pressing the

button again within 3 seconds

unlocks the other doors.

Unlocks both side door

Unlocks the trunk

(press and hold)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system

Locks both side doors

Check that the door is securely

locked.

Locks driver’s door

Check that the door is securely

locked.

Unlocks both side doors

Pressing the button unlocks

the driver’s door. Pressing the

button again within 3 seconds

unlocks the other doors.

Unlocks both side door

Unlocks the trunk

(press and hold)

: Vehicles with a double locking system

: Vehicles without a double locking system

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Operation signals

The emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/

unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)

■Door lock buzzer (vehicles with a smart entry & start system)

If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a

buzzer sounds continuously. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock

the vehicle once more.

■Security feature

If a door is not opened within approximately 30 seconds after the vehicle is

unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.

■Conditions affecting operation

Vehicles without a smart entry & start system

The wireless remote control function may not operate normally in the follow-

ing situations:

●When the wireless key battery is depleted

●Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large dis-

play, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electri-

cal noise

●When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless commu-

nication devices

●When the wireless key is in contact with, or is covered by a metallic

object

●When other wireless key (that emit radio waves) is being used nearby

●If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to

the rear window

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system

P. 4 1

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

■If the wireless remote control does not operate properly (vehicles with

a smart entry & start system)

Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk: Use the mechanical

key. (P. 479)

■Key battery depletion

Vehicles without a smart entry & start system

If the wireless remote control function does not operate, the battery may be

depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (P. 384)

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system

P. 4 5

■When the electronic key battery is fully depleted

P. 384

■Confirmation of the registered key number (vehicles with a smart entry

& start system)

The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask

any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional for details.

■Customization that can be configured at any authorized Toyota dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional

Settings (e.g. wireless remote control system) can be changed.

(Customizable features P. 5 11 )

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Certification for wireless remote control

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

86_EE (OM18089E)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

86_EE (OM18089E)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

86_EE (OM18089E)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

86_EE (OM18089E)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

86_EE (OM18089E)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Doors

The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function,

wireless remote control, key or door lock switch.

■Entry function (vehicles with a smart entry & start system)



P. 3 6

■Wireless remote control



P. 6 2

■Key

Turning the key operates the doors as follows:

Vehicles without a smart entry & start system

Locks both side doors

Locks driver’s door

Unlocks both side doors

Turning the key unlocks the

driver’s door. Turning the key

again unlocks the other doors.

Unlocks driver’s door

: Vehicles with a double locking system

: Vehicles without a double locking system

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system

The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical

key. (P. 479)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

86_EE (OM18089E)

Locking the doors from the outside without a key

Move the inside lock button to the lock position.

Close the door while pulling the door handle.

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system

The door cannot be locked if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in

ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is left

inside the vehicle.

The key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.

■Door lock switch

Locks both side doors

Unlocks both side doors

■Inside lock button

Locks the door

Unlocks the door

STEP

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Window open/close function linked to door operation

In order to make opening and closing the doors easier, completely closed

windows are linked to door operations. Therefore, when a door is opened, its

window opens slightly. When a door is closed, its window closes completely.

However, if the battery has discharged or is disconnected, this function will

not operate. (P. 487)

■If a wrong key is used (vehicles with a double locking system)

The key cylinder rotates freely to isolate inside mechanism.

■If the smart entry & start system has been deactivated in a customized

setting (vehicles with a smart entry & start system)

Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. (P. 62, 479)

WARNING

■To prevent an accident

Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.

Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out,

resulting in death or serious injury.

●Always use a seat belt.

●Ensure that both side doors are properly closed.

●Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.

The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehi-

cle and it may result in serious injury or death.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

86_EE (OM18089E)

Trunk

The trunk can be opened using the key, trunk opener, entry function

or wireless remote control.

■Opening the trunk from inside the vehicle

Press and hold the opener

switch to release the trunk lid.

■Opening the trunk from outside the vehicle

Key (vehicles without a smart entry & start system and the

double locking system)

Turn the master key clockwise

to release the trunk lid.

Entry function (vehicles with a smart entry & start system)



P. 3 7

Wireless remote control



P. 6 2

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Trunk light

The trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened.

■Function to prevent the trunk being locked with the electronic key

inside (vehicles with a smart entry & start system)

●When all doors are being locked, closing the trunk lid with the electronic

key left inside the trunk will sound an alarm.

In this case, the trunk lid can be opened using the entry function.

●Even when the spare electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors

locked, the key confinement prevention function can be activated so the

trunk can be opened. In order to prevent theft, take all electronic keys

with you when leaving the vehicle.

●Even when the electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors are

locked, the key may not be detected depending on the places and the

surrounding radio wave conditions. In this case, the key confinement pre-

vention function cannot be activated, causing the doors to lock when the

trunk is closed. Make sure to check where the key is before closing the

trunk.

●The key confinement prevention function cannot be activated if any one

of the doors is unlocked. In this case, open the trunk using the trunk

opener.

■Using the mechanical key (vehicles with a smart entry & start system

but without the double locking system)

The trunk can be also opened using the mechanical key. (P. 479)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■Caution while driving

●Keep the trunk lid closed while driving.

If the trunk lid is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or lug-

gage in the trunk may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.

In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a seri-

ous health hazard. Make sure to close the trunk lid before driving.

●Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the

trunk lid is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving, caus-

ing an accident.

●Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a colli-

sion, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.

■When children are in the vehicle

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

●Do not allow children to play in the trunk.

If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could suffer from heat

exhaustion, suffocation or other injuries.

●Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid.

Doing so may cause the trunk lid to operate unexpectedly, or cause the

child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■Using the trunk

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in seri-

ous injury.

●Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before

opening it. Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to suddenly shut again

after it is opened.

●When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the

surrounding area is safe.

●If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that

the trunk is about to open or close.

●Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it

may move abruptly in strong wind.

●The trunk lid may suddenly shut if it is

not opened fully. It is more difficult to

open or close the trunk lid on an

incline than on a level surface, so

beware of the trunk lid unexpectedly

opening or closing by itself. Make

sure that the trunk lid is fully open

and secure before using the trunk.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

●Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the trunk

lid. Such additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to suddenly

shut again after it is opened.

■Trunk lid damper stays

Do not pull on or disassemble the trunk lid damper stays, or dispose of them

in a fire. Illustrations on the trunk lid damper stays indicate the following:

●When closing the trunk lid, observe

the following precautions:

• Take extra care to prevent your

fingers etc. from being caught.

Vehicles without a rear spoiler

• Make sure to press the trunk lid

lightly on its outer surface.

Vehicles with a rear spoiler

• Do not place your hand(s)

between the rear spoiler and trunk

lid when closing the trunk lid.

• To close the trunk lid, press the

rear spoiler on either of the por-

tions .

: Do not pull

: Do not disassemble

: Do not dispose of in fire

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

NOTICE

■Trunk damper stays

The trunk lid is equipped with damper stays that hold the trunk lid in place.

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause damage to trunk damper stays, resulting in a

malfunction.

●Do not attach any foreign objects such as stickers, plastic sheets and

adhesives to damper stay rods.

●Do not touch damper stay rods with gloves or other fabric items.

●Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the trunk

lid.

●Do not apply lateral force to damper stays or place your hand on it.

86_EE (OM18089E)

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Front seats

Seat position adjustment

lever

Seatback angle adjustment

lever

Vertical height adjustment

lever (driver’s side only)

Seatback fold strap

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Getting in and out of the rear seats

To get in and out of the rear seats, use the seatback angle adjust-

ment lever or seatback fold strap.

■Before getting in or out of the rear seats

Release the seat belt from the seat belt guide. (P. 9 4 )

■Getting in the rear seats

Lift the seatback angle adjust-

ment lever.

The seatback will fold forward.

Front passenger seat only: The

seat can be slid forward and

backward.

■Getting out of the rear seats

Pull the seatback fold strap.

The seatback will fold forward.

Front passenger seat only: The

seat can be slid forward and

backward.

■After getting in or out of the rear seats

Return the seatback to the upright position until the seat locks.

Front passenger seat only: The seat will lock in position at the point where

the seatback reaches the upright position.

■Seat dust cover

Always remove the seat dust cover that may be attached at the time of pur-

chase before using the seat.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■Seat adjustment

●To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not

recline the seat more than necessary.

If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply

restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the

shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of

an accident.

Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpect-

edly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

●After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in position.

●Take care not to hit passengers with the seat.

When sliding the seat rearward, make sure not to squash the legs of the

rear passengers.

●When returning the seatback upright, perform seatback angle adjustment

while holding down the seatback.

●Do not pull on or use the front seat belt guide to adjust or fold the front

seat.

●Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid

injury. Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.

■When driving the vehicle

Never operate the seatback angle adjustment lever or seatback fold strap.

Doing so could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

■Getting in and out of the rear seats

●When getting in or out of the rear seats, make sure not to get your hands,

legs, etc. squashed in the movable or connecting parts.

●When getting in or out of the rear seats, make sure not to trip on the seat

rails.

●After getting in or out of the rear seats, always make sure the front seat is

locked in position.

■When operating the front seat from the rear seat

Make sure that no passenger is seated in the front seat.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Rear seats

■Seat dust cover

Always remove the seat dust cover that may be attached at the time of pur-

chase before using the seat.

WARNING

■When folding the rear seatbacks down

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

●Do not fold the seatbacks down while driving.

●Stop the vehicle on level ground, set the parking brake and shift the shift

lever to P (automatic transmission) or N (manual transmission).

●Do not allow anyone to sit on a folded seatback or in the trunk while driv-

ing.

●Do not allow children to enter the trunk.

The seatbacks of the rear seats can be folded down.

Press the seatback lock

release buttons and fold the

seatback down.

Press the button until the lock

is released.

To return the seatbacks to its

original position, lift it up until it

locks.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■After returning the rear seatback to the upright position

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

●Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback.

■Before using the rear seat belts

●Make sure that the seatback is

securely locked in position by lightly

pushing it back and forth.

If the seatback is not securely locked,

the red portion behind the seatback

lock release button will be visible.

Make sure that the red portion is not

visible.

Always make sure that the seat belt is not

caught in the seatback or twisted in one

of the hooks that secure the seatback.

Failure to do so may cause the seat belt

to not be fastened correctly or to become

ineffective in a collision, resulting in death

or serious injury.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Head restraints

■Removing the head restraints

■Installing the head restraints

Pull the head restraints up.

Down

Push the head restraint down

while pushing the lock release

button.

Lock release button

Pull the head restraint up while pushing

the lock release button.

Align the head restraint with the installa-

tion holes and push it down to the lock

position.

Press and hold the lock release button

when lowering the head restraint.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Adjusting the height of the head restraints

WARNING

■Head restraint precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to

do so may result in death or serious injury.

●Use head restraints designed for each respective seat.

●Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.

●After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure

they are locked in position.

●Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

Make sure that the head restraints are

adjusted so that the center of the head

restraint is closest to the top of your ears.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driv-

ing the vehicle.

■Correct use of the seat belts

●Extend the shoulder belt so

that it comes fully over the

shoulder, but does not

come into contact with the

neck or slide off the shoul-

der.

●Position the lap belt as low

as possible over the hips.

●Adjust the position of the

seatback. Sit up straight

and well back in the seat.

●Do not twist the seat belt.

■Fastening and releasing the seat belt

Fasten the seat belt

Push the plate into the buckle

until a click sound is heard.

Release the seat belt

Press the release button.

Release button

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

86_EE (OM18089E)

Front seat belt guide

To enable the seat belt to be

easily extended, pass the seat

belt through the guide.

When getting in or out of the rear

seats, release the seat belt from

the guide.

Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)

The pretensioner helps the seat

belt to quickly restrain the occu-

pant by retracting the seat belt

when the vehicle is subjected to

certain types of severe frontal

collision.

The pretensioner may not acti-

vate in the event of a minor frontal

impact, a side impact or a rear

impact.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Emergency locking retractor (ELR)

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also

lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to

extend so that you can move around fully.

■Child seat belt usage

The seat belts of your vehicle are principally designed for persons of adult

size.

●Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child

becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 161)

●When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat

belt, follow the instructions on P. 93 regarding seat belt usage.

■Seat belt pretensioners

●Seat belt pretensioners are not designed to activate in minor frontal or

side impact, in side or rear impacts or in roll-over accidents.

●The following four components operate simultaneously.

• Seat belt pretensioner for driver

• Seat belt pretensioner for front passenger

• SRS frontal airbag for driver

• SRS frontal airbag for front passenger

●Pretensioners are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. In the

event that a pretensioner is activated, both the driver’s and front passen-

ger’s seat belt retractor assemblies must be replaced only by any autho-

rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped

professional. When replacing seat belt retractor assemblies for the front

seating positions, use only genuine Toyota parts equipped with a force

limiter.

●If either front seat belt does not retract or cannot be pulled out due to a

malfunction or activation of the pretensioner, contact any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional as soon as possible.

●If the front seat belt retractor assembly or surrounding area has been

damaged, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional as soon as possible.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

86_EE (OM18089E)

●When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to explain to the buyer that it

has seat belt pretensioners by alerting the buyer to the contents of this

section.

■Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated

If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate

for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent colli-

sions.

■Seat belt regulations

If seat belt regulations exist in the country where you reside, please contact

any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional, for seat belt replacement or installation.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of

sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

■Wearing a seat belt

●Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.

●Always wear a seat belt properly.

●Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt

for more than one person at once, including children.

●Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always

use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.

●To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than

necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting

up straight and well back in the seats.

●Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.

●Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■Pregnant women

■People with a medical condition

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way.

■When children are in the vehicle

Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes

twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries

that could result in death.

If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used

to cut the belt.

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat

belt in the proper way. (P. 9 3 )

Women who are pregnant should position

the lap belt as low as possible over the

hips in the same manner as other occu-

pants. Extend the shoulder belt com-

pletely over the shoulder and position the

belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact

over the rounding of the abdominal area.

If the seat belt is not worn properly, not

only pregnant woman, but also the fetus

could suffer death or serious injury as a

result of sudden braking or a collision.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■Seat belt pretensioners

●If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In

that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at any

authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

●To obtain maximum protection, the occupants should sit in an upright posi-

tion with their seat belts properly fastened.

●Do not modify, remove or strike the front seat belt retractor assemblies or

surrounding area. This could result in accidental activation of the seat belt

pretensioners or could make the system inoperative, possibly resulting in

serious injury. Seat belt pretensioners have no user-serviceable parts. For

required servicing of front seat belt retractors equipped with seat belt

pretensioners, see any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional.

●When discarding front seat belt retractor assemblies or scrapping the

entire vehicle due to collision damage or for other reasons, consult any

authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■Seat belt damage and wear

●Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be

jammed in the door.

●Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose

parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat

belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.

●Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted.

If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact any autho-

rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-

fessional.

●Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been

involved in a serious accident, even if there's no obvious damage.

●Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the

seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional. Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from

operating properly, resulting in death or serious injury.

■When using the seat belt guide

●Always make sure that the belt is not twisted, and runs freely through the

guide.

●Regardless of whether the guide is used or not, always secure the seat

belt guide button.

●Do not hang from or pull the guide forcefully.

■Before using the rear seat belts

Always make sure that the seat belt is not

caught in the seatback or twisted in one

of the hooks that secure the seatback.

Failure to do so may cause the seat belt

to not be fastened correctly or to become

ineffective in a collision, resulting in death

or serious injury.

100

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

86_EE (OM18089E)

Steering wheel

WARNING

■Caution while driving

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident,

resulting in death or serious injury.

■After adjusting the steering wheel

Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.

Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an

accident, and resulting in death or serious injury.

The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.

Hold the steering wheel and

push the lever down.

Adjust to the ideal position by

moving the steering wheel

horizontally and vertically.

After adjustment, pull the lever

up to secure the steering

wheel.

STEP

101

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror

Adjusting the height of rear view mirror

Adjust the height of the rear view

mirror by moving it up and down.

Anti-glare function

Reflected light from the headlights of vehicles behind can be

reduced by operating the lever.

Normal position

Anti-glare position

The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to enable sufficient

confirmation of the rear view in accordance with the driver's seating

posture.

WARNING

■Caution while driving

Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.

Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident,

resulting in death or serious injury.

102

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

86_EE (OM18089E)

Outside rear view mirrors

Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch.

Select a mirror to adjust.

Left

Right

Adjust the mirror.

Right

Down

Left

STEP

103

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Folding the mirrors

Press the switch to fold the mir-

rors.

Press it again to extend them to

the original position.

■The mirrors can be adjusted when

Vehicles without a smart entry & start system

The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON

mode.

■When the mirrors are fogged up

The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers.

Turn on the rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror

defoggers. (P. 306)

104

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■When driving the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while driving.

Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an

accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

●Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.

●Do not drive with the mirrors folded.

●Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly

adjusted before driving.

■When a mirror is moving

To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your

hand caught by the moving mirror.

■When the mirror defoggers are operating

Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and

burn you.

105

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

1-4. Opening and closing the windows

Power windows

Window lock switch

Press the switch down to lock

the passenger window glasses.

Use this switch to prevent chil-

dren from accidentally opening or

closing a passenger window.

The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.

Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:

Closing

One-touch closing

Opening

One-touch opening

*: Pushing the switch in the

opposite direction will stop win-

dow travel partway.

106

1-4. Opening and closing the windows

86_EE (OM18089E)

■The power windows can be operated when

Vehicles without a smart entry & start system

The engine switch is in the “ON” position.

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■Operating the power windows after turning the engine off

Vehicles without a smart entry & start system

The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even

after the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. They can-

not, however, be operated once either door is opened.

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system

The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even

after the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or

turned off. They cannot, however, be operated once either door is opened.

■Jam protection function

If an object becomes caught between the window and the body, window

travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.

107

1-4. Opening and closing the windows

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

■When the power window does not close normally

If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot

be closed, close all the doors and perform the following operations using the

power window switch on the relevant door.

Vehicles without a smart entry & start system: After stopping the

vehicle, the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position.

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system: After stopping the vehi-

cle, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON

mode.

Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position two

consecutive times.

Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position

once again and continue holding for 1 second or more after the win-

dow closes completely.

If you push the power window switch to the opening position while the win-

dow is moving, start again from the beginning. If the window continues to

close but then re-open slightly even after performing the above procedure

correctly, have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

STEP

108

1-4. Opening and closing the windows

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■Closing the windows

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

●The driver is responsible for all the power window operations, including the

operation for the passengers. In order to prevent accidental operation,

especially by a child, do not let a child operate the power windows. It is

possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in

the power window. Also, when riding with a child, it is recommended to use

the window lock switch. (P. 105)

●Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body

in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.

●When exiting the vehicle, turn the engine switch (vehicles without a smart

entry & start system) or the “ENGINE START STOP” switch (vehicles with

a smart entry & start system) off, carry the key and exit the vehicle along

with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc.,

that may possibly lead to an accident.

■Jam protection function

●Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection

function.

●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just

before the window fully closes.

109

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

1-5. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap

Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:

■Before refueling the vehicle

●Vehicles without a smart entry & start system: Turn the engine

switch off and ensure that all the doors and windows are

closed.

●Vehicles with a smart entry & start system: Turn the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch off and ensure that all the doors and

windows are closed.

●Confirm the type of fuel. (P. 11 0 )

■Opening the fuel tank cap

Pull up the opener to open the

fuel filler door.

Turn the fuel tank cap slowly

to open.

STEP

110

1-5. Refueling

86_EE (OM18089E)

Closing the fuel tank cap

After refueling, turn the fuel tank

cap until you hear a click. Once

the cap is released, it will turn

slightly in the opposite direction.

Hang the fuel tank cap on the

back of the fuel filler door.

STEP

■Fuel types

EU area:

Unleaded gasoline confirming to European standard EN228, Research

Octane Number of 98 or higher

Except EU area:

Unleaded gasoline, Research Octane Number of 98 or higher

If unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 98 RON is not available,

unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 95 RON may be used with no

detriment to engine durability or driveability.

■Use of ethanol blended gasoline in a gasoline engine

Toyota allows the use of ethanol blended gasoline where the ethanol content

is up to 10%. Make sure that the ethanol blended gasoline to be used has a

Research Octane Number that follows the above.

111

1-5. Refueling

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■Refueling the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

●Do not handle fuel indoors.

●After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an

unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to

discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from

static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.

●Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.

A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened.

Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap.

In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out of the filler neck and cause

injury.

●Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their

body to come close to an open fuel tank.

●Do not allow anyone to approach the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler

pipe while refueling is in progress.

●Do not inhale vaporized fuel.

Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.

●Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.

Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.

●Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically

charged.

This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition

hazard.

112

1-5. Refueling

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■When refueling

Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel

tank:

●Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck.

●Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off.

●Do not top off the fuel tank.

●Observe other precautions that are posted at the service station.

●Turn the cap to the right until it clicks to ensure that it is fully tightened. If

the cap is not securely tightened, fuel spillage could occur in the event of

an accident, creating a fire hazard.

■When replacing the fuel cap

Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your

vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in

death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■Refueling

●Do not spill fuel during refueling.

Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control

system to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the

vehicle's painted surface.

●Never add any cleaning agents to the fuel tank. The addition of a cleaning

agent may cause damage to the fuel system.

●Immediately put fuel in the tank whenever the low fuel warning light illumi-

nates. Engine misfires as a result of an empty tank could cause damage to

the engine.

113

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer system

The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the

engine from starting if the key has not been previously registered in

the vehicle's on-board computer.

Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does not

guarantee absolute security against all vehicle thefts.

Vehicles without a smart

entry & start system

The indicator light flashes after

the key has been removed

from the engine switch to indi-

cate that the system is operat-

ing.

The indicator light stops flash-

ing after the registered key

has been inserted into the

engine switch to indicate that

the system has been

canceled.

114

1-6. Theft deterrent system

86_EE (OM18089E)

■When the vehicle cannot be started with the registered key (vehicles

without a smart entry & start system)

Remove the key and try again.

■System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.

■Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction

●If the key is in contact with a metallic object

●If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system

(key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle

Vehicles with a smart entry

& start system

The indicator light flashes after

the “ENGINE START STOP”

switch has been turned off to

indicate that the system is

operating.

The indicator light stops flash-

ing after the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch has been turned

to ACCESSORY or IGNITION

ON mode to indicate that the

system has been canceled.

115

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Certification for engine immobilizer system (vehicles with a smart

entry & start system)

116

1-6. Theft deterrent system

86_EE (OM18089E)

117

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

118

1-6. Theft deterrent system

86_EE (OM18089E)

119

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

120

1-6. Theft deterrent system

86_EE (OM18089E)

121

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

122

1-6. Theft deterrent system

86_EE (OM18089E)

123

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

124

1-6. Theft deterrent system

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Certification for engine immobilizer system (vehicles without a smart

entry & start system)

125

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

126

1-6. Theft deterrent system

86_EE (OM18089E)

NOTICE

■To ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper

operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

127

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Double locking system



Setting the double locking system

Vehicles without a smart entry & start system: Turn the engine switch

off, have all the passengers exit the vehicle and ensure that all the

doors are closed.

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system: Turn the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch off, have all the passengers exit the vehicle and ensure

that all the doors are closed.

Using the entry function (vehicles with a smart entry & start system):

Press the lock button on the outside door handle.

Using the wireless remote control:

Press .



: If equipped

Unauthorized access to the vehicle is prevented by disabling the

door unlocking function from both the interior and exterior of the

vehicle.

Vehicles employing this sys-

tem have labels on the win-

dow glass of both front doors.

128

1-6. Theft deterrent system

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■Double locking system precaution

Never activate the double locking system when there are people in the vehi-

cle because all the doors cannot be opened from inside the vehicle.

129

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

1-7. Safety information

Correct driving posture

Drive with a good posture as follows:

Sit upright and well back in

the seat. (P. 8 6 )

Adjust the position of the

seat forward or backward to

ensure the pedals can be

reached and easily

depressed to the extent

required. (P. 86)

Adjust the seatback so that

the controls are easily oper-

able. (P. 8 6 )

Adjust the tilt and telescopic

positions of the steering

wheel to allow easy opera-

tion and to ensure the

airbag is facing your chest.

(P. 100)

Lock the head restraint in

place with the center of the

head restraint closest to the

top of your ears. (P. 9 1)

Wear the seat belt correctly.

(P. 9 3 )

130

1-7. Safety information

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■While driving

●Do not adjust the position of the driver's seat.

Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

●Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.

A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce

the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of

death or serious injury to the driver or passenger.

●Do not place anything under the front seats.

Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat

tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an acci-

dent resulting in serious injury or death. The adjustment mechanism may

also be damaged.

■Adjusting the seat position

●Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passen-

gers are not injured by the moving seat.

●Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid

injury.

Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.

131

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain

types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the

occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the

risk of death or serious injury.

SRS: This stands for supplemental restraint system. This name is

used because the airbag system supplements the vehicle’s seat

belts.

Models with SRS airbags and seat belts for driver, front pas-

senger, and rear passengers

Your vehicle is equipped with a supplemental restraint system to

supplement the seat belts for the front seats and rear seating posi-

tions.

The supplemental restraint system (SRS) consists of seven

airbags. The configurations are as follows.

132

1-7. Safety information

86_EE (OM18089E)

■When you sell your vehicle

When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to explain to the buyer that it is

equipped with SRS airbags by alerting the buyer to the applicable section in

this Owner’s Manual.

Front airbags for driver and front passenger

Knee airbag for driver

Side airbags for driver and front passenger

Curtain shield airbags for driver, front passenger and rear pas-

sengers

These SRS airbags are designed only as a supplement to the pri-

mary protection provided by the seat belt.

The system also controls front seat belt pretensioners. For opera-

tion instructions and precautions concerning the seat belt

pretensioner, refer to “Seat belt pretensioners”. (



P. 94)

133

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■SRS airbag

●To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident, the driver and

all passengers in the vehicle should always wear seat belts when the vehi-

cle is moving. The SRS airbag is designed only to be a supplement to the

primary protection provided by the seat belt. It does not eliminate the need

to fasten seat belts. In combination with the seat belts, it offers the best

combined protection in case of a serious accident.

Not wearing a seat belt increases the chance of severe injury or death in a

crash even when the vehicle has the SRS airbag.

For instructions and precautions concerning the seat belt system, refer to

“Seat belts”. (P. 9 3 )

●Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the SRS airbag. Because the

SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed - faster than the blink of an

eye - and force to protect in high speed collisions, the force of an airbag

can injure an occupant whose body is too close to SRS airbag.

It is also important to wear your seat belt to help avoid injuries that can

result when the SRS airbag contacts an occupant not in proper position

such as one thrown forward during pre-accident braking.

Even when properly positioned, there remains a possibility that an occu-

pant may suffer minor injury such as abrasions and bruises to the face or

arms because of the SRS airbag deployment force.

●The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force. Occupants

who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer

very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for

deployment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat

as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehi-

cle control and the front passenger should move the seat as far back as

possible and sit upright and well back in the seat.

●Do not place any objects over or near the SRS airbag cover or between

you and the SRS airbag. If the SRS airbag deploys, those objects could

interfere with its proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehicle

and cause injury.

134

1-7. Safety information

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■SRS airbag

●NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT

SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD

BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

●Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the front passenger’s seat, or

never hold a child on your lap or in your arms. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable force and can injure or even kill the child.

●A deploying SRS airbag releases hot gas. Occupants could get burned if

they come into direct contact with the hot gas.

●Put children in the REAR seat properly

restrained at all times in a child restraint

device or in a seat belt, whichever is

appropriate for the child’s age, height

and weight. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable speed and force and

can injure or even kill children, espe-

cially if they are not restrained or

improperly restrained. Because chil-

dren are lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from deploy-

ment is greater.

Secure ALL types of child restraint

devices (including forward facing child

seats) in the REAR seats at all times.

According to accident statistics, chil-

dren are safer when properly restrained

in the rear seating positions than in the

front seating positions.

For instructions and precautions con-

cerning the child restraint system, refer

to “Child restraint systems”. (P. 161)

135

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

NOTICE

■When the SRS airbag deploys

When the SRS airbag deploys, some smoke will be released. This smoke

could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other

breathing trouble. If you or your passengers have breathing problems after

SRS airbag deploys, get fresh air promptly.

136

1-7. Safety information

86_EE (OM18089E)

SRS airbag system components

Front sub sensor (right-hand

side)

Front airbag module (driver's

side)

Front passenger’s front

airbag ON and OFF indicator

(center of instrument panel)

Front airbag module (front

passenger’s side)

Front passenger’s front

airbag cut off switch (pas-

senger’s side of instrument

panel)

Door impact sensor (right-

hand side)

Curtain shield airbag mod-

ule (right-hand side)

Airbag wiring

Side airbag module (front

passenger’s side)

Side airbag sensor (center

pillar right-hand side)

Curtain shield airbag sensor

(rear wheel house right-hand

side)

Seat belt pretensioner (front

passenger’s side)

Satellite safing sensor

(under the center of the rear

seats)

Curtain shield airbag sensor

(rear wheel house left-hand

side)

Side airbag module (driver’s

side)

Seat belt pretensioner

(driver’s side)

Side airbag sensor (center

pillar left-hand side)

137

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The

SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag control module. The

airbag control module consists of an airbag sensor.

In certain types of severe front or side impacts, the SRS airbag sys-

tem triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators

quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion

of the occupants.

Door impact sensor (left-

hand side)

Driver’s knee airbag module

Airbag control module

(including impact sensors)

Front sub sensor (left-hand

side)

Curtain shield airbag mod-

ule (left-hand side)

138

1-7. Safety information

86_EE (OM18089E)

SRS front airbag

The driver’s SRS front airbag is stowed in the center portion of the steering

wheel. The driver’s knee airbag is stowed under the steering column. The

passenger’s SRS front airbag is stowed near the top of the dashboard under

an “SRS AIRBAG” mark.

In a moderate to severe front collision, the following components deploy.

●SRS front airbag for driver

●SRS front airbag for front passenger

●Knee airbag for driver

These components supplement the seat belts by reducing the impact to the

occupant’s head, chest and knees.

■If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)

●Slight abrasions, burns, bruising etc., may be sustained from SRS

airbags, due to the extremely high speed deployment (inflation) by hot

gases.

●A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.

●Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator)

as well as the front seats, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side

rails, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.

●The windshield may crack.

■Front-seat passenger airbag manual cut off switch

The passenger-side front airbag can be deactivated by the cut off switch

located in the instrumental panel side. When the cut off switch is turned to

the deactivation mode the passenger-side front airbag becomes deacti-

vated. When the cutoff switch is turned to the activation mode the passen-

ger-side front airbag becomes active to deploy. While the passenger-side

front airbag is active the A/B ON indicator is illuminated.

139

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Normal operation

■When the system is malfunctioning

ON OFF

Front airbag for front passenger Activated Deactivated

Seat belt pretensioner for front pas-

senger

Activated ActivatedSide air bag for front passenger

Curtain shield air bag for front pas-

senger

SRS warning light Not illuminated Not illuminated

Airbag manual on-off indicator “ON” Illuminated Not illuminated

Airbag manual on-off indicator

“OFF” Not illuminated Illuminated

Airbag manual on-off

switch

Airbag system

Airbag system Operation

Front airbag for front passenger Deactivated

Seat belt pretensioner for front pas-

senger

ActivatedSide air bag for front passenger

Curtain shield air bag for front pas-

senger

SRS warning light Illuminated

Airbag manual on-off indicator “ON” Not illuminated

Airbag manual on-off indicator

“OFF” Illuminated

140

1-7. Safety information

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Operation

Driver's side

*: Models with knee airbag

Passenger’s side

SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a

collision occurs.

After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start

to deflate immediately so that the

driver’s vision is not obstructed.

SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a

collision occurs.

After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start

to deflate immediately so that the

driver's vision is not obstructed.

141

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

The SRS airbag can function only when the engine switch is in the “ON”

position (vehicles without a smart entry & start system) or when the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a

smart entry & start system).

If the front sub sensors located on both the right and left sides at the front of

the vehicle and the impact sensors in the airbag control module detect a cer-

tain predetermined amount of force during a front collision, the control mod-

ule sends signals to the front airbag modules instructing them to inflate the

SRS front airbags. Then both airbag modules produce gas, which instantly

inflates driver’s and passenger’s SRS front airbags. The knee airbag is also

inflated in combination with the SRS front airbags.

After deployment, the SRS airbags immediately start to deflate so that the

driver’s vision is not obstructed. The time required from detecting impact to

the deflation of the SRS airbag after deployment is shorter than the blink of

an eye.

Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS airbag would activate in a non-

accident situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag will deflate quickly, not

obscuring vision and will not interfere with the driver's ability to maintain con-

trol of the vehicle.

When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will be

heard and some smoke will be released. These occurrences are normal

result of the deployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.

142

1-7. Safety information

86_EE (OM18089E)

The SRS front airbag (and also the knee airbag) is designed to deploy in the

event of an accident involving a moderate to severe front collision. It is not

designed to deploy in most lesser front impacts because the necessary pro-

tection can be achieved by the seat belt alone. Also, it is not designed to

deploy in most side or rear impacts or in most roll-over accidents because

deployment of the SRS front airbag would not help the occupant in those sit-

uations.

The SRS airbag is designed to function on a one-time-only basis.

SRS airbag deployment depends on the level of force experienced in the

passenger compartment during a collision. That level differs from one type of

collision to another, and it may have no bearing on the visible damage done

to the vehicle itself.

■When will the SRS front airbag most likely deploy?

■At what other times might the SRS front airbag deploy?

A head-on collision against a thick con-

crete wall at a vehicle speeds of 20 to 30

km/h (12 to 19 mph) or higher activates

the SRS front airbag. The SRS front

airbag will also be activated when the

vehicle is exposed to a front impact simi-

lar in fashion and magnitude to the colli-

sion described above.

The SRS front airbag may be activated

when the vehicle sustains a hard impact

in the undercarriage area from the road

surface (such as when the vehicle

plunges into a deep ditch, is severely

impacted or knocked hard against an

obstacle on the road such as a curb).

143

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

■When is the SRS front airbag unlikely to deploy?

The vehicle strikes an object, such as a

telephone pole or sign pole.

The vehicle slides under the load bed of a

truck.

The vehicle sustains an oblique offset

front impact.

The vehicle sustains an offset front colli-

sion.

144

1-7. Safety information

86_EE (OM18089E)

There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS

front airbag deployment. In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the

SRS front airbag may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces

involved.

■When will the SRS front airbag not deploy?

The vehicle strikes an object that can

move or deform, such as a parked vehi-

cle.

The SRS front airbag is not designed to

deploy in most cases if the vehicle is

struck from the side or from behind, or if it

rolls onto its side or roof, or if it is involved

in a low-speed front collision.

145

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■SRS front airbag precaution

Do not touch the SRS airbag system components around the steering wheel

and dashboard with bare hands right after deployment. Doing so can cause

burns because the components can be very hot as a result of deployment.

First impact

Second impact

In an accident where the vehicle is

impacted more than once, the SRS front

airbag deploys only once on the first

impact.

Example: In the case of a double colli-

sion, first with another vehicle, then

against a concrete wall in immediate suc-

cession, once the SRS front airbag is

activated on the first impact, it will not be

activated on the second.

146

1-7. Safety information

86_EE (OM18089E)

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag

The SRS side airbag is stored in the door side of each front seat seatback,

which bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label.

In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS side airbag on the

impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occupant and the door

panel and supplements the seat belt by reducing the impact on the occupant’s

chest.

The curtain shield airbag on each side of the cabin is stored in the roof side

(between the front pillar and a point over the rear seat). An “SRS AIRBAG”

mark is located at the top of each front and rear pillar.

In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS curtain shield airbag on

the impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occupant and the side

window and supplements the seat belt by reducing the impact on the occu-

pant’s head.

■Operation

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag can function only when

the engine switch is in the “ON” position (vehicles without a smart entry &

start system) or when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION

ON mode (vehicles with a smart entry & start system).

147

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS side airbags and SRS curtain shield

airbags deploy independently of each other since each has its own impact

sensor. Therefore, they may not both deploy in the same accident. Also, the

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag deploy independently of the

driver’s and front passenger’s SRS front airbags in the steering wheel and

instrument panel.

An impact sensor, which senses impact force, is located in each of the left

and right center pillars, doors and rear wheel houses. Another impact sen-

sor, which also senses impact force, is located under the rear center seat.

If one of the center pillar impact sensors and the impact sensor that is

located under the rear center seat together sense an impact force above a

predetermined level in a side collision, the control module causes both the

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag on the impacted side to

inflate regardless of whether the rear wheel house impact sensor on the

same side senses an impact.

If one of the rear wheel house impact sensors and the impact sensor that is

located under the rear center seat together sense an impact force above a

predetermined level in a side collision, the control module causes only the

SRS curtain shield airbag on the impacted side to inflate.

After the deployment, the SRS side airbag immediately starts to deflate. The

time required from detection of an impact to deflation of an SRS side airbag

after deployment is shorter than the blink of an eye. The SRS curtain shield

airbag remains inflated for a while following deployment then slowly deflates.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag deploy even when no

one occupies the seat on the side on which an impact is applied.

148

1-7. Safety information

86_EE (OM18089E)

When the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag deploy, a sudden,

fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and some smoke will be released.

These occurrences are a normal result of the deployment. This smoke does

not indicate a fire in the vehicle.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag are designed to deploy

in the event of an accident involving a moderate to severe side impact colli-

sion. They are not designed to deploy in most lesser side impact. Also, they

are not designed to deploy in most front or most rear impacts because SRS

side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag deployment would not help the

occupant in those situations.

Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag are designed to func-

tion on a onetime-only basis.

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag deployment depend on the

level of force experienced in the passenger compartment during a side

impact collision. That level differs from one type of collision to another, and it

may have no bearing on the visible damage done to the vehicle itself.

■When will the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag most

likely deploy?

■When are the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag unlikely to

deploy?

A severe side impact near the front seat

activates the SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain shield airbag.

The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-

on impact.

149

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS

side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag deployment. In the event of acci-

dents like those illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield

airbag may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.

The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact in an area outside the vicinity of

the passenger compartment.

The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or

similar object.

The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact from a motorcycle.

The vehicle rolls onto its side or roof.

150

1-7. Safety information

86_EE (OM18089E)

■When will the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag not

deploy?

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag are not designed to

deploy in most cases if the vehicle is involved in a front collision or is struck

from behind. Examples of such accidents are illustrated.

In an accident where the vehicle is struck from the side more than once, the

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag deploy only once on the first

impact.

Example: In the case of a double side impact collision, first with one vehicle

and immediately followed by another from the same direction, once the SRS

side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag are activated on the first impact,

they will not be activated on the second.

The vehicle is involved in front collision

with another vehicle (moving or station-

ary).

The vehicle is struck from behind.

SRS curtain shield airbag

SRS side airbag

Second impact First impact

151

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

■When to contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional

In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Con-

tact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional as soon as possible.

●Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.

●The front of the vehicle is damaged or

deformed, or was involved in an acci-

dent that was not severe enough to

cause the SRS airbags to inflate.

●A portion of a door is damaged or

deformed, or the vehicle was involved

in an accident that was not severe

enough to cause the SRS side airbags

and curtain shield airbags to inflate.

●The pad section of the steering wheel,

dashboard or lower portion of the

instrument panel is scratched, cracked,

or otherwise damaged.

●The surface of the seats with the side

airbag is scratched, cracked, or other-

wise damaged.

152

1-7. Safety information

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■If the SRS airbags deploy

Do not touch the SRS side airbag system components around the front seat

seatback with bare hands right after deployment. Doing so can cause burns

because the components can be very hot as a result of deployment.

After deployment, do not touch any part of the SRS curtain shield airbag sys-

tem (from the front pillar to the part of the roof side over the rear seat). Doing

so can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of

deployment.

■SRS airbag precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the airbags.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

●The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts

properly.

The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.

●The portion of the front pillars, rear pil-

lars or roof side rail garnishes (padding)

containing the curtain shield airbags

inside is scratched, cracked or other-

wise damaged.

153

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■SRS airbag precautions

●The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause

death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.

Since the risk zone for driver airbag is the first 50 - 75 mm (2 - 3 in.) of

inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10 in.) from your driver airbag provides

you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the cen-

ter of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 250 mm

(10 in.) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways:

• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the

pedals comfortably.

• Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary,

many drivers can achieve the 250 mm (10 in.) distance, even with the

driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat

somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the

road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the

seat if your vehicle has that feature.

• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the

airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as recommended above, while still maintain-

ing control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instru-

ment panel controls.

154

1-7. Safety information

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■SRS airbag precautions

●The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and

can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very

close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the

airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits

upright.

●Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or

seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small

to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint sys-

tem. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in

the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are

safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. (P. 161)

●Do not sit on the edge of the seat or

lean against the dashboard.

●Do not allow a child to stand in front of

the SRS front passenger airbag unit or

sit on the knees of a front passenger.

●Do not allow the front seat occupants to

hold items on their knees.

155

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■SRS airbag precautions

●Do not lean against the door, the roof

side rail or the front, side and rear pil-

lars.

●Do not allow anyone to kneel on the

passenger seat toward the door or put

their head or hands outside the vehicle.

●Do not attach anything to or lean any-

thing against areas such as the dash-

board, steering wheel pad or lower

portion of the instrument panel.

These items can become projectiles

when SRS driver, front passenger and

knee airbags deploy.

●Do not attach anything to areas such as

a door, windshield glass, side door

glass, rear quarter glass, front or rear

pillar, roof side rail and assist grip.

(Except for the speed limit label

P. 450)

156

1-7. Safety information

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■SRS airbag precautions

●If the vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy,

be sure to remove it.

●Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side

airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. Such

accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable

the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in

death or serious injury.

●Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS

airbag components (P. 136).

Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.

●Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS

airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.

●If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a

door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do

so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.

●If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel

pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have

them replaced by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional.

●The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag are designed only to

be a supplement to the primary protection provided by the seat belt. They

do not do away with the need to fasten seat belts. It is also important to

wear your seat belt to help avoid injuries that can result when an occupant

is not seated in a proper upright position.

●Vehicles without a smart entry & start

system only: Do not attach any heavy,

sharp or hard objects such as keys and

accessories to the key. The objects

may restrict the SRS knee airbag infla-

tion or be thrust into the driver's seat

area by the force of the deploying

airbag, thus causing a danger.

157

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components

Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications

without consulting any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional.

The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing

death or serious injury.

●Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags.

●Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel,

instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear

pillars or roof side rails.

●Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the

occupant compartment.

●Installation of a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows,

winches.

●Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system.

●Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD

players.

●Installation of electronic devices such as an RF-transmitter and CD play-

ers.

●Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability.

158

1-7. Safety information

86_EE (OM18089E)

SRS airbag system monitor

■SRS warning light

A diagnostic system continually

monitors the readiness of the

SRS airbag system (including

front seat belt pretensioners)

while the vehicle is being driven.

The SRS warning light will show

normal system operation by illu-

minating for approximately 6

seconds when the engine switch

is turned to the “ON” position

(vehicles without a smart entry &

start system), or the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch is turned

to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles

with a smart entry & start sys-

tem).

The following components are monitored by the indicator.

●Front sub sensor

• Right-hand side

• Left-hand side

●Airbag control module (including impact sensor)

●Front airbag module

• Driver’s side

• Front passenger’s side

●Knee airbag module (driver’s side)

Vehicles with a monochrome multi-

information display

Vehicles with a color multi-information

display

159

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

●Side airbag sensor

• Center pillar right-hand side

• Center pillar left-hand side

●Side airbag module

• Driver’s side

• Front passenger’s side

●Curtain shield airbag sensor

• Rear wheel house right-hand side

• Rear wheel house left-hand side

●Curtain shield airbag module

• Right-hand side

• Left-hand side

●Satellite safing sensor (under the center of the rear seats)

●Seat belt pretensioner

• Driver’s side

• Front passenger’s side

●All related wiring

●Door impact sensor

• Right-hand side

• Left-hand side

●Front passenger’s front airbag cut off switch (passenger's side of

instrument panel)

●Front passenger’s front airbag ON and OFF indicator

160

1-7. Safety information

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■SRS warning light

If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions, there may be a

malfunction in the seat belt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag system. We

recommend that you have the system checked immediately by your nearest

any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional. Unless checked and properly repaired, the seat belt

pretensioners and/or SRS airbags will operate improperly (e.g. SRS airbags

may inflate in a very minor collision or not inflate in a severe collision), which

may increase the risk of injury.

●Flashing or flickering of the warning light

●No illumination of the warning light when the engine switch is first turned to

the “ON” position (vehicles without a smart entry & start system), or the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles

with a smart entry & start system).

●Continuous illumination of the warning light

●Illumination of the warning light while driving

161

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Child restraint systems

Points to remember

Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is

safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.

●Choose a child restraint system appropriate to the age and size of

the child.

●For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the

child restraint system.

General installation instructions are provided in this manual.

(P. 170)

●If child restraint system regulations exist in the country where you

reside, please contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional for the child

restraint system installation.

●Toyota recommends that you use a child restraint system which

conforms to the regulation “ECE No.44”.

Types of child restraints

Child restraint systems are classified into the following 5 groups

according to the regulation ECE No.44:

Group 0: Up to 10 kg (22 lb.) (0 - 9 months)

Group 0

: Up to 13 kg (28 lb.) (0 - 2 years)

Group I: 9 to 18 kg (20 to 39 lb.) (9 months - 4 years)

Group II: 15 to 25 kg (34 to 55 lb.) (4 years - 7 years)

Group III: 22 to 36 kg (49 to 79 lb.) (6 years - 12 years)

In this owner's manual, the following popular 3 types of child restraint

systems that can be secured with the seat belts are explained.

Toyota strongly urges the use of child restraint systems.

162

1-7. Safety information

86_EE (OM18089E)

Baby seat

Equal to Group 0 and 0

of ECE

No.44

Child seat

Equal to Group 0

and I of ECE

No.44

Junior seat

Equal to Group II and III of ECE

No.44

163

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Child restraint system suitability for various seating positions

Provided information in the table shows your child restraint system

suitability for various seating positions.

Front passenger seat

Rear seat

Airbag manual on-off

switch

OFF

0 (up to 10 kg [22 lb.]) X

Never put L3, L4 X

(up to 13 kg [28 lb.]) X

Never put L3, L4 X

I (9 to 18 kg [20 to 39 lb.])

Rear-facing

Never put

L1 U

Forward-

facing

II, III (15 to 36 kg [34 to 79 lb.]) L2, L5 L2, L5 U, L2

Mass groups

Seating position

164

1-7. Safety information

86_EE (OM18089E)

Note

When you use child restraint system on the front passenger seat, you

must turn off the airbag manual on-off switch.

Key of letters inserted in the above table:

U: Suitable for “universal” category child restraint system approved

for the use in this mass group.

L1: Suitable for “TOYOTA DUO+” (9 to 18 kg [20 to 39 lb.]) approved

for the use in this mass group.

L2: Suitable for “TOYOTA KID FIX” (15 to 36 kg [34 to 79 lb.])

approved for the use in this mass group.

L3: Suitable for “TOYOTA G 0+,BABY SAFE PLUS” (up to 13 kg [28

lb.]) approved for the use in this mass group.

L4: Suitable for “TOYOTA G 0+,BABY SAFE PLUS with SEAT BELT

FIXATION, BASE PLATFORM” (up to 13 kg [28 lb.]) approved for

the use in this mass group.

L5: Suitable for “TOYOTA KID” (15 to 36 kg [34 to 79 lb.]) approved

for the use in this mass group.

X: Not suitable seat position for children in this mass group.

The child restraint systems mentioned in the table may not be avail-

able outside of the EU area.

Other child restraint systems different from the systems mentioned in

the table can be used, but the suitability of the systems must be care-

fully checked with the child restraint system manufacturer and

retailer.

165

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Child restraint system suitability for various seating positions

(with ISOFIX rigid anchors)

Provided information in the table shows your child restraint system

suitability for various seating positions.

Mass groups Size

class Fixture Vehicle ISOFIX positions

Rear seat

Carrycot

ISO/L1

ISO/L2

(1) X

0 (up to 10 kg

[22 lb.])

ISO/R1

(1) X

(up to 13 kg

[28 lb.])

ISO/R1

ISO/R2

ISO/R3

(1) X

I (9 to 18 kg

[20 to 39 lb.])

ISO/R2

ISO/R3

ISO/F2

IUF

ISO/F2X

IUF

ISO/F3

(1) X

II (15 to 25 kg

[34 to 55 lb.]) (1) X

III (22 to 36 kg

[49 to 79 lb.]) (1) X

166

1-7. Safety information

86_EE (OM18089E)

(1) For the CRS which do not carry the ISO/XX size class identifica-

tion (A to G), for the applicable mass group, the car manufac-

turer shall indicate the vehicle specific ISOFIX child restraint

system(s) recommended for each position.

Key of letters inserted in the above table:

IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal

category approved for use in this mass group.

X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems

in this mass group and/or this size class.

The child restraint systems mentioned in the table may not be avail-

able outside of the EU area.

Other child restraint systems different from the systems mentioned in

the table can be used, but the suitability of the systems must be care-

fully checked with the child restraint system manufacturer and

retailer.

167

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

■When installing the child restraint system on the front passenger seat

When you have to use a child restraint system on the front passenger seat,

adjust the following:

■Selecting an appropriate child restraint system

●Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child

becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.

●If a child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear

seat and use the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 93)

●The seat cushion to the fully rearward

position

●The seatback to the most upright posi-

tion

168

1-7. Safety information

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■Using a child restraint system

The use of a child restraint system not suitable for the vehicle may not prop-

erly secure the infant or child. It may result in death or serious injury (in the

event of sudden braking or an accident).

■Child restraint precautions

●For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child

must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system

depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is

not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be

crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior.

●Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that con-

forms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to acci-

dent statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat

than in the front seat.

169

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■Child restraint precautions

●Never use a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat

when the airbag manual on-off switch is on. (P. 180)

In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front pas-

senger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child.

●A forward-facing child restraint system should be allowed to be installed

on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the

seat as far back as possible, because the front passenger airbag could

inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be

killed or seriously injured.

●Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body

against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side

rails from which the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy

even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if

the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact

could cause death or serious injury to the child.

●Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by

the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If

it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child

in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.

■When children are in the vehicle

Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes

twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries

that could result in death.

If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used

to cut the belt.

■When the child restraint system is not in use

●Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is

not in use. Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compart-

ment.

●If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the

vehicle or store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring

passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.

170

1-7. Safety information

86_EE (OM18089E)

Installing child restraints

Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly

secure child restraints to the rear seats using a seat belt or a ISOFIX

rigid anchors. Attach the top strap when installing a child restraint.

Installation with a seat belt

(



P. 171)

ISOFIX rigid anchors (ISOFIX

child restraint system)

Lower anchors are provided for

the both rear seats. (Buttons

displaying the location of the

anchors are attached to the

seats.)

Anchor bracket (for top strap)

Anchor brackets are provided

for both rear seats.

171

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Installing child restraints using a seat belt

■Rear facing Baby seat/child seat

Place the child restraint system

on the rear seat facing the rear

of the vehicle.

Run the seat belt through the

child restraint system and insert

the plate into the buckle. Make

sure that the belt is not twisted.

Follow the directions given in the

child restraint system installation

manual and fix the child restraint

system securely in place.

If your child restraint system is

not equipped with a lock-off (a

seat belt locking feature), secure

the child restraint system using a

locking clip.

After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to

ensure that it is installed securely.

STEP

172

1-7. Safety information

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Forward facing Child seat

Place the child restraint system

on the seat facing the front of the

vehicle.

Run the seat belt through the

child restraint system and insert

the plate into the buckle. Make

sure that the belt is not twisted.

Follow the directions given in the

child restraint system installation

manual and fix the child restraint

system securely in place.

If your child restraint system is

not equipped with a lock-off (a

seat belt locking feature), secure

the child restraint system using a

locking clip.

After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to

ensure that it is installed securely.

STEP

173

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Junior seat

Place the child restraint system

on the seat facing the front of the

vehicle.

Sit the child in the child restraint

system. Fit the seat belt to the

child restraint system and insert

the plate into the buckle. Make

sure that the belt is not twisted.

Check that the shoulder belt is

correctly positioned over the

child's shoulder and that the lap

belt is as low as possible.

(P. 9 3 )

STEP

174

1-7. Safety information

86_EE (OM18089E)

Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt

Push the buckle release button

and fully retract the seat belt.

Installation with ISOFIX rigid anchor (ISOFIX child restraint system)

Latch the buckles onto the exclu-

sive fixing bars.

If the child restraint has a top

strap, the top strap should be

latched onto the anchor bracket.

175

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Child restraint systems with a top strap

Secure the child restraint using a seat belt or ISOFIX rigid

anchor.

Remove the anchor bracket

cover.

Store the removed cover in a safe

place.

Latch the hook onto the anchor

bracket and tighten the top strap.

Make sure the top strap is

securely latched.

STEP

176

1-7. Safety information

86_EE (OM18089E)

■When installing a child restraint system (without a lock-off) using a

seat belt

You need a locking clip to install the child restraint system using a seat belt.

Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the system. If your

child restraint system does not provide a locking clip, you can purchase the

following item from any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional.

Locking clip for child restraint system

(Part No. 73119-22010)

■When installing a child restraint system with ISOFIX rigid anchors and

a top strap

Depending on the child restraint system's size and shape, if the child

restraint system is installed to the fixing bars first, it may not be possible to

attach the top strap to the anchor bracket.

In that case, first temporarily attach the top strap to the anchor bracket,

install the child restraint system using the ISOFIX rigid anchors and then

tighten the top strap.

177

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■When installing a child restraint system

Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual

and fix the child restraint system securely in place.

If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other

passengers may be injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking,

sudden swerving or an accident.

●If the driver's seat interferes with the

child restraint system and prevents it

from being attached correctly, attach

the child restraint system to the right-

hand rear seat (left-hand drive vehicles)

or the left-hand rear seat (right-hand

drive vehicles).

●Adjust the front passenger seat so that

it does not interfere with the child

restraint system.

●When installing a forward-facing child

restraint system on the front passenger

seat, move the seat as far back as pos-

sible.

Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury if the airbags deploy

(inflate).

178

1-7. Safety information

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■When installing a child restraint system

●Never use a rear-facing child restraint

system on the front passenger seat

when the airbag manual on-off switch is

on. (P. 180)

The force of the rapid inflation of the

front passenger airbag can cause death

or serious injury to children in the event

of an accident.

●There is a label(s) on the passenger

side sun visor, indicating it is forbidden

to attach a rear-facing child restraint

system to the front passenger seat.

Details of the label(s) are shown in the

illustration below.

179

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■When installing a child restraint system

●If child restraint system regulations exist in the country where you reside,

please contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional for the child restraint system installa-

tion.

●When a junior seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is

positioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be

kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's

shoulder. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event

of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

●Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes

twisted around a child’s neck, choking or other serious injuries may result

in death.

If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be

used to cut the belt.

●Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not

twisted.

●Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward

to ensure that it has been securely installed.

●After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.

●Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system

manufacturer.

■To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors

When using the lower anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects

around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child

restraint system. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached,

or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the

event of sudden braking, sudden swerve or an accident.

180

1-7. Safety information

86_EE (OM18089E)

Airbag manual on-off system

This system deactivates the front passenger airbag.

Only deactivate the airbags when using a child restraint system on

the front passenger seat.

Airbag manual on-off indica-

tor

Vehicles without a smart

entry & start system

This indicator light turns on

when the airbag system is on

(only when the engine switch is

in the “ON” position).

Vehicles with a smart entry &

start system

This indicator light turns on

when the airbag system is on

(only when the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch is in

IGNITION ON mode).

Airbag manual on-off switch

181

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Deactivating the front passenger airbag

Vehicles without a smart entry

& start system

Insert the key into the cylinder

and turn to the “OFF” position.

The “OFF” indicator light turns on

(only when the engine switch is in

the “ON” position).

Vehicles with a smart entry &

start system

Insert the mechanical key into

the cylinder and rotate to the

“OFF” position.

The “OFF” indicator light turns on

(only when the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON

mode).

182

1-7. Safety information

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Airbag manual on-off indicator information

●The front passenger’s front airbag ON and OFF indicators shows you the

status of the front passenger’s SRS front airbag. When the engine switch

is turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without a smart entry & start sys-

tem) or the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON

mode (vehicles with a smart entry & start system), both the ON and OFF

indicators illuminate while the system is checked, after which both indica-

tors turn off. After that, “ON” or “OFF” on the ON-OFF indicator will be

illuminated according to the position of the airbag manual on-off switch.

●If any of the following problems occur, it is possible that there is a mal-

function in the system. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional.

• Neither “ON” nor “OFF” comes on.

• The indicator light does not change when the airbag manual on-off

switch is switched to “ON” or “OFF”.

WARNING

■When installing a child restraint system

For safety reasons, always install a child restraint system in a rear seat. In

the event that the rear seat cannot be used, the front seat can be used as

long as the airbag manual on-off system is set to “OFF”.

If the airbag manual on-off system is left on, the strong impact of the airbag

deployment (inflation) may cause serious injury or even death.

■When a child restraint system is not installed on the front passenger

seat

Ensure that the airbag manual on-off system is set to “ON”.

If it is left off, the airbag may not deploy in the event of an accident, which

may result in serious injury or even death.

When driving

183

86_EE (OM18089E)

2-1. Driving procedures

Driving the vehicle ............ 184

Engine (ignition) switch

(vehicles with a smart

entry & start system)....... 198

Engine (ignition) switch

(vehicles without a smart

entry & start system)....... 207

Automatic transmission .... 210

Manual Transmission ....... 217

Turn signal lever ............... 221

Parking brake ................... 222

Horn.................................. 223

2-2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters .......... 224

Indicators and

warning lights.................. 228

Multi-information display

(monochrome display).... 234

Multi-information display

(color display) ................. 239

2-3. Operating the lights and

windshield wipers

Headlight switch................ 255

Fog light switch................. 261

Windshield wipers

and washer ..................... 262

2-4. Using other driving

systems

Cruise control.................... 265

Driving assist systems ...... 270

Hill-start assist control....... 277

2-5. Driving information

Cargo and luggage ........... 281

Winter driving tips ............. 283

Trailer towing .................... 287

184

86_EE (OM18089E)

2-1. Driving procedures

Driving the vehicle

The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driv-

ing:

■Starting the engine

P. 198, 207

■Driving

Vehicles with an automatic transmission

With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.

(P. 210)

Release the parking brake. (P. 222)

Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the

accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

Vehicles with a manual transmission

While depressing the clutch pedal, shift the shift lever to 1.

(P. 217)

Release the parking brake. (P. 222)

Gradually release the clutch pedal. At the same time, gently

depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

■Stopping

Vehicles with an automatic transmission

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

If necessary, set the parking brake.

If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift

the shift lever to P or N. (P. 210)

Vehicles with a manual transmission

While depressing the clutch pedal, depress the brake

pedal.

If necessary, set the parking brake.

If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift

the shift lever to N. (



P. 217)

STEP

185

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Parking the vehicle

Vehicles with an automatic transmission

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

Shift the shift lever to P. (P. 210)

Set the parking brake. (P. 222)

Vehicles without a smart entry & start system:

Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position to stop the

engine.

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system:

Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to stop the

engine.

Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your

person.

If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.

Vehicles with a manual transmission

While depressing the clutch pedal, depress the brake

pedal.

Shift the shift lever to N. (P. 217)

Set the parking brake. (P. 222)

Vehicles without a smart entry & start system:

Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position to stop the

engine.

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system:

Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to stop the

engine.

Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your

person.

If parking on a hill, shift the shift lever to 1 or R and block the

wheels as needed.

STEP

186

2-1. Driving procedures

86_EE (OM18089E)

Starting off on a steep uphill

Vehicles with an automatic transmission

Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever

to D.

Gently depress the accelerator pedal.

Release the parking brake.

Vehicles with a manual transmission

With the parking brake firmly set and the clutch pedal fully

depressed, shift the shift lever to 1.

Lightly depress the accelerator pedal at the same time as

gradually releasing the clutch pedal.

Release the parking brake.

■When starting off on an uphill

When enabled, the hill-start assist control can operate. (P. 277)

■Driving in the rain

●Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the

windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.

●Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be

especially slippery.

●Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain,

because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road

surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.

STEP

187

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Engine speed while driving (vehicles with an automatic transmission)

In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving.

This is due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation

to meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration.

●The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill

●When the accelerator pedal is released

●When driving on curves

●When the brake pedal is firmly depressed

■New vehicle break-in driving (the first 1600 km [1000 miles])

The performance and long life of your vehicle are dependent on how you

handle and care for your vehicle while it is new. Follow these instructions

during the first 1600 km (1000 miles):

●Do not allow the engine speed to exceed 4000 rpm except in an emer-

gency.

●Do not drive at one constant engine or vehicle speed for a long time,

either fast or slow.

●Avoid starting suddenly and rapid acceleration, except in an emergency.

●Avoid hard braking, except in an emergency.

The same break-in procedures should be applied to an overhauled

engine, newly mounted engine or when brake pads or brake linings are

replaced with new ones.

■High friction brake pads (if equipped)

The brake pads and discs are designed for use under high load conditions.

Therefore, brake noise may be generated depending on the vehicle speed,

braking force and vehicle environment (temperature, humidity, etc.).

■Drum-in-disc type parking brake system

Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of

brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or when-

ever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have any autho-

rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped

professional perform the bedding down.

188

2-1. Driving procedures

86_EE (OM18089E)

■After the engine starts

In order to secure a rich exhaust sound when starting the vehicle and envi-

ronmental performance, air intake and exhaust sounds become loud and

vibrations may increase for a little while after the engine starts. This is not a

malfunction.

■Operating your vehicle in a foreign country

Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability

of the correct fuel. (P. 499)

■REV indicator (if equipped)

WARNING

■When starting the vehicle (vehicles with an automatic transmission)

●Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine

running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.

●Firmly depress the brake pedal because engine speed may increase

immediately after starting the engine, when the air conditioning system is

operating, when turning the steering wheel, etc., thereby causing creeping

to become stronger. Apply the parking brake as necessary.

When the set engine speed is reached

the REV indicator comes on and a buzzer

sounds to inform the driver. (P. 249)

(When the engine speed enters the red

zone, the REV indicator flashes regard-

less of settings.)

189

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■When driving the vehicle

●Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accel-

erator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.

• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake

pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident

that could result in death or serious injury.

• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a diffi-

culty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.

• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the

vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and acceler-

ator pedals properly.

• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake

pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, result-

ing in an accident.

●Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.

The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot

parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.

●On vehicles with an automatic transmission, do not let the vehicle roll

backward while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while

the shift lever is in R.

Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering

performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.

●If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and

check that the trunk is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can

cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious

health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional immedi-

ately.

●On vehicles with a manual transmission, do not shift the shift lever to R

while the vehicle is moving forward.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle

control.

●Do not shift the shift lever to a driving position while the vehicle is moving

backward.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle

control.

190

2-1. Driving procedures

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

●On vehicles with a manual transmission, do not release the clutch pedal

too quickly. Doing so may propel the vehicle forward, possibly causing an

accident.

●Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the

engine from the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is

selected.

●During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off

while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the

power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to

steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it

is safe to do so.

However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible

to stop the vehicle in the normal way: P. 493

●Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving

down a steep hill.

Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose

effectiveness. (P. 211, 217)

●Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or

outside rear view mirrors while driving.

Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents,

resulting in death or serious injury.

●Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their body

are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.

191

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■When driving on slippery road surfaces

●Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and

reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.

●Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shifting, or changes in engine

speed could cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident.

●After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make

sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent

the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet

and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in

an accident.

■When shifting the shift lever

●On vehicles with an automatic transmission, be careful not to shift the shift

lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. Shifting the shift lever to a

gear other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the

vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.

●Do not place items in the shift lever's surrounding area. It may cause incor-

rect operation.

●If the shift boot is pulled out during cleaning, return it to its previous posi-

tion. If the shift boot is left pulled out, the shift lever may become difficult to

operate.

■If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear indicators)

Have the brake pads checked and replaced by any authorized Toyota dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional as soon as

possible.

Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.

It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads

and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.

192

2-1. Driving procedures

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■When the vehicle is stopped

●Do not race the engine.

If the vehicle is in any gear other than P (vehicles with an automatic trans-

mission only) or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly,

causing an accident.

●Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.

If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space

and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.

●On vehicles with an automatic transmission, in order to prevent accidents

due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal

while the engine is running, and apply the parking brake as necessary.

●If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused

by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal

and securely apply the parking brake as needed.

●Avoid revving or racing the engine.

Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause

the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible

material is nearby.

193

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■When the vehicle is parked

●Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in

the vehicle when it is in the sun.

Doing so may result in the following:

• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a

fire.

• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and

plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.

• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the

interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehi-

cle's electrical components.

●Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a

place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when

luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.

●Do not attach suction cups to the windshield or windows. Do not place

containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard.

Suction cups or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.

●Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a

metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause

the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.

●Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P (vehicles with an

automatic transmission only), stop the engine and lock the vehicle.

Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.

●Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the engine is running or immediately

after turning the engine off.

Doing so may cause burns.

●Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it

is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is

running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead

to death or a serious health hazard.

194

2-1. Driving procedures

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■Exhaust gases

Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless

and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health

hazard.

●If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed

area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.

This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

●The exhaust system should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or

crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise,

be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional. Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle,

resulting in death or a serious health hazard.

■When taking a nap in the vehicle

Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift

lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire

due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly

ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to

death or a serious health hazard.

195

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■When braking

●When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.

Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause

one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the

parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.

●If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other

vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking.

In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be

depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase.

Have your brakes fixed immediately.

●Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.

Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted

brakes.

●The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems; if one of the

systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal

should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will

increase.

Have your brakes fixed immediately.

196

2-1. Driving procedures

86_EE (OM18089E)

NOTICE

■Pre-driving check

Trapping small animals in the cooling fan and belts of the engine may result

in a malfunction. Check that no small animal enters the engine compartment

and under the vehicle before starting the engine.

■When driving the vehicle

Vehicles with an automatic transmission

●Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during

driving, as this may restrain driving torque.

●Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake

pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.

Vehicles with a manual transmission

●Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during

driving, as this may restrain driving torque.

●Do not shift gears unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed. After shifting,

do not release the clutch pedal abruptly. Doing so may damage the clutch,

transmission and gears.

●Observe the following to prevent the clutch from being damaged.

• Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving.

Doing so may cause clutch trouble.

• Do not use any gear other than the 1st gear when starting off and mov-

ing forward.

Doing so may damage the clutch.

• Do not use the clutch to hold the vehicle when stopping on an uphill

grade.

Doing so may damage the clutch.

●Do not shift the shift lever to R when the vehicle is still moving. Doing so

may damage the clutch, transmission and gears.

●Do not release the clutch pedal too quickly. Doing so may damage the

transmission.

■When parking the vehicle (vehicles with an automatic transmission)

Always shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to

move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is acci-

dentally depressed.

197

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

NOTICE

■Avoiding damage to vehicle parts

●Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for

an extended period of time.

Doing so may damage the power steering motor.

●When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid

damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.

●On vehicles with an automatic transmission, do not race the engine for

more than 5 seconds in any position except the N or P position when the

brake is applied or when chocks are used in the wheels. This may cause

the transmission fluid to overheat.

■If you get a flat tire while driving

A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering

wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.

●It may be difficult to control your vehicle.

●The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.

●The vehicle will lean abnormally.

Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (P. 446, 462)

■When encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may

cause the following serious damage to the vehicle:

●Engine stalling

●Short in electrical components

●Engine damage caused by water immersion

In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be

sure to have any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly quali-

fied and equipped professional check the following:

●Brake function

●Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, trans-

mission, differential, etc.

●Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints

(where possible) and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.

198

2-1. Driving procedures

86_EE (OM18089E)

Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles with a smart entry & start system)

Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic

key on your person starts the engine or changes “ENGINE START

STOP” switch modes.

■Starting the engine

Vehicles with an automatic transmission

Check that the parking brake is set.

Check that the shift lever is set in P.

If the shift lever is not set in P, the engine may not be started.

(P. 210)

Firmly depress the brake pedal.

The smart entry & start system indicator light (green) will turn on.

If the indicator light does not turn on, the engine cannot be

started.

Press the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch shortly and

firmly.

When operating the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch, one

short, firm press is enough. It is

not necessary to press and

hold the switch.

The engine will crank until it

starts or for up to 10 seconds,

whichever is less.

Continue depressing the brake

pedal until the engine is com-

pletely started.

The engine can be started

from any “ENGINE START

STOP” switch mode.

STEP

199

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Vehicles with a manual transmission

Check that the parking brake is set.

Check that the shift lever is set in N.

Firmly depress the clutch pedal.

The smart entry & start system indicator light (green) will turn on.

If the indicator light does not turn on, the engine cannot be

started.

Press the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch shortly and

firmly.

When operating the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch, one

short, firm press is enough. It is

not necessary to press and

hold the switch.

The engine will crank until it

starts or for up to 10 seconds,

whichever is less.

Continue depressing the clutch

pedal until the engine is com-

pletely started.

The engine can be started

from any “ENGINE START

STOP” switch mode.

STEP

200

2-1. Driving procedures

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Stopping the engine

Vehicles with an automatic transmission

Stop the vehicle.

Shift the shift lever to P.

Set the parking brake. (P. 222)

Release the brake pedal.

Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch.

Check that the smart entry & start system indicator light

(green) is off.

Vehicles with a manual transmission

While depressing the clutch pedal, stop the vehicle.

Shift the shift lever to N.

Set the parking brake. (P. 222)

Release the clutch pedal.

Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch.

Check that the smart entry & start system indicator light

(green) is off.

STEP

201

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode

Modes can be changed by pressing the “ENGINE START STOP”

switch with the brake pedal (vehicles with an automatic transmis-

sion) or clutch pedal (vehicles with a manual transmission)

released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.)

Off*

The emergency flashers can

be used.

The smart entry & start system

indicator light (green) is off.

ACCESSORY mode

Some electrical components

such as the power outlet can

be used.

The smart entry & start system

indicator light (green) flashes

slowly.

IGNITION ON mode

All electrical components can

be used.

The smart entry & start system

indicator light (green) flashes

slowly.

*: Vehicles with an automatic

transmission: If the shift lever is

in a position other than P when

turning off the engine, the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch

will be turned to ACCESSORY

mode, not to off.

202

2-1. Driving procedures

86_EE (OM18089E)

When stopping the engine with the shift lever in a position other

than P (vehicles with an automatic transmission)

If the engine is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P,

the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will not be turned off but instead

be turned to ACCESSORY mode. Perform the following procedure to

turn the switch off:

Check that the parking brake is set.

Shift the shift lever to P.

Check that the smart entry & start system indicator light

(green) flashes slowly and then press the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch once.

Check that the smart entry & start system indicator light

(green) is off.

■Auto power off function

Vehicles with an automatic transmission

If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or IGNI-

TION ON mode (the engine is not running) for more than an hour with the

shift lever in P, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will automatically turn off.

However, this function cannot entirely prevent battery discharge. Do not

leave the vehicle with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY

or IGNITION ON mode for long periods of time when the engine is not run-

ning.

Vehicles with a manual transmission

If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or IGNI-

TION ON mode (the engine is not running) for more than an hour, the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch will automatically turn off. However, this

function cannot entirely prevent battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle

with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON

mode for long periods of time when the engine is not running.

STEP

203

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Operation of the “ENGINE START STOP” switch

If the switch is not pressed shortly and firmly, the “ENGINE START STOP”

switch mode may not change or the engine may not start.

■Electronic key battery depletion

P. 4 5

■Conditions affecting operation

P. 4 1

■Note for the entry function

P. 4 2

■If the engine does not start

The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 113)

Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional.

■Steering lock

After turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off and opening and closing

the doors, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function.

Operating the “ENGINE START STOP” switch again automatically cancels

the steering lock.

Vehicles with an automatic transmission:

Check that the shift lever is securely set

in P. The engine may not start if the shift

lever is displaced out of P. The smart

entry & start system indicator light (green)

will flash quickly.

204

2-1. Driving procedures

86_EE (OM18089E)

■When the steering lock cannot be released

■Steering lock motor overheating prevention

To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be sus-

pended if the engine is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time.

In this case, refrain from operating the engine. After about 10 seconds, the

steering lock motor will resume functioning.

■If the smart entry & start system indicator flashes in yellow and a mes-

sage is displayed on the multi-information display

The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by any

authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped

professional immediately.

■If the electronic key battery is depleted

P. 384

■If the smart entry & start system has been deactivated in a customized

setting

P. 480

■Immediately after reconnecting the battery terminals due to replacing

the battery and so forth

The engine may not start. If this occurs, turn the “ENGINE START STOP”

switch to IGNITION ON mode, and start the engine after waiting at least 10

seconds. Idling may be unstable immediately after the engine starts, how-

ever, this is not a malfunction.

The smart entry & start system indicator

light (green) will flash quickly and a mes-

sage will be shown on the multi-informa-

tion display. (P. 435)

Vehicles with an automatic transmis-

sion

Check that the shift lever is set in P. Press

the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while

turning the steering wheel left and right.

Vehicles with a manual transmission

Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch

while turning the steering wheel left and

right.

205

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■When starting the engine

●Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress

the accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.

Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

●If the smart entry & start system indicator light flashes in green after the

engine has started, never drive the vehicle. The steering wheel is still

locked, and it may result in an accident.

■Caution while driving

If engine failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the

doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the

steering lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in death

or serious injury.

■Stopping the engine in an emergency

If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle,

press and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for more than 2 seconds,

or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession. (P. 493)

However, do not touch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while driving

except in an emergency. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause

loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will

be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull

over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

206

2-1. Driving procedures

86_EE (OM18089E)

NOTICE

■To prevent battery discharge

●Do not leave the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNI-

TION ON mode for long periods of time without the engine running.

●If the smart entry & start system indicator light (green) is illuminated, the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch is not off. When exiting the vehicle,

always check that the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is off.

●Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Do not stop the engine when the

shift lever is in a position other than P. If the engine is stopped in another

shift lever position, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will not be turned

off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. If the vehicle is left in

ACCESSORY mode, battery discharge may occur.

■When starting the engine

●Do not race a cold engine.

●If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehi-

cle checked by authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly quali-

fied and equipped professional immediately.

●Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Do not shift the select lever while

the starter is operating.

■Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the “ENGINE START STOP”

switch

If the “ENGINE START STOP” switch seems to be operating somewhat dif-

ferently than usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a mal-

function. Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional immediately.

207

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles without a smart entry & start system)

■Starting the engine

Vehicles with an automatic transmission

Check that the parking brake is set.

Check that the shift lever is set in P.

Firmly depress the brake pedal.

Turn the engine switch to the “START” position to start the

engine.

Vehicles with a manual transmission

Check that the parking brake is set.

Check that the shift lever is set in N.

Firmly depress the clutch pedal.

Turn the engine switch to the “START” position to start the

engine.

■Changing the engine switch positions

“LOCK”

The steering wheel is locked

and the key can be removed.

(Vehicles with an automatic

transmission: The key can be

removed only when the shift

lever is in P.)

“ACC”

Some electrical components

such as the power outlet can

be used.

“ON”

All electrical components can

be used.

“START”

For starting the engine.

STEP

208

2-1. Driving procedures

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Turning the key from “ACC” to “LOCK”

Shift the shift lever to N (manual transmission) or P (automatic

transmission). (P. 210, 217)

■If the engine does not start

The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 113)

Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional.

■When the steering lock cannot be released

■Key reminder function

A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door is opened while the engine switch is in

the “LOCK” or “ACC” position to remind you to remove the key.

■Immediately after reconnecting the battery terminals due to replacing

the battery and so forth

The engine may not start. If this occurs, turn the engine switch to the “ON”

position, and start the engine after waiting at least 10 seconds. Idling may be

unstable immediately after the engine starts, however, this is not a malfunc-

tion.

STEP

Push in the key and turn to the “LOCK”

position.

STEP

When starting the engine, the engine

switch may seem stuck in the “LOCK”

position. To free it, turn the key while turn-

ing the steering wheel slightly left and

right.

209

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■When starting the engine

Always start the engine while sitting in the driver's seat. Do not depress the

accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.

Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

■Caution when driving

Do not turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position while driving. If, in an

emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the

engine switch only to the “ACC” position to stop the engine. An accident may

result if the engine is stopped while driving. (P. 493)

NOTICE

■To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the engine switch in the “ACC” or “ON” position for long periods

of time without the engine running.

■When starting the engine

●Do not crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time. This may

overheat the starter and wiring system.

If the engine does not start, turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position

and try to start the engine again after waiting for 10 seconds or more.

●Do not race a cold engine.

●If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehi-

cle checked by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional immediately.

●Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Do not shift the select lever while

the starter is operating.

210

2-1. Driving procedures

86_EE (OM18089E)

Automatic transmission



Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.

■Shifting the shift lever

Vehicles without a smart entry & start system

While the engine switch is in the “ON” position, move the

shift lever with the brake pedal depressed.

When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the

vehicle is completely stopped.

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system

While the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION

ON mode, move the shift lever with the brake pedal

depressed.

When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the

vehicle is completely stopped.



: If equipped

211

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Shift position uses

*: Shifting to the D position allows the system to select a gear suitable for

the driving conditions. Setting the shift lever to the D position is recom-

mended for normal driving.

Shift

position

Multi-information display

Function

Monochrome

display Color display

PParking the vehicle/start-

ing the engine

RReversing

NNeutral

Normal D position driving*

(gears between “1” and “6”

are automatically

selected)

(paddle shift switches

activated)

(paddle shift switches

activated)

Temporary manual mode

driving (P. 215)

MManual mode driving

(P. 213)

212

2-1. Driving procedures

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Selecting a driving mode

By pressing the driving pattern selector switch the following

modes can be selected to suit driving and usage conditions:

Normal mode

Sport mode

The “SPORT” indicator comes on.

Use sport mode for sporty driving or when driving in mountainous

regions with lots of curves.

Snow mode

The “SNOW” indicator comes on.

Use snow mode for accelerating and driving on slippery road surfaces

such as snow.

To cancel sport mode or snow mode, press the same side of the

switch again.

213

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Manual mode driving

To enter manual mode, shift the shift lever to the M position.

When the Gear Shift Indicator is on, gears can be selected by operat-

ing the shift lever or paddle shift switches (if equipped), allowing you

to drive in the gear of your choosing.

The Gear Shift Indicator display is a guide to help the driver achieve

improved fuel economy and reduced exhaust emissions within limits

of engine performance.

Even if upshifting operations are performed, if vehicle speed is too low for

the requested gear, the gear will not change.

Upshift indicator

Downshift indicator

Upshifting (+)

Downshifting (-)

Each time the shift lever or pad-

dle shift switches are operated,

the gear changes up or down

one gear and the selected gear,

“1” through “6”, will be set.

The selected gear, from “1” to “6”,

and “M” will be displayed on the

shift position and shift range indi-

cator.

: Vehicles with a monochrome multi-information display

: Vehicles with a color multi-information display

214

2-1. Driving procedures

86_EE (OM18089E)

When in manual mode, the gear will not change unless the shift lever

or paddle shift switches are operated.

However, even when in manual mode, the gears will be automatically

changed in the following situations:

●When vehicle speed drops (downshift only).

●When engine oil temperature is high and engine speed rises close

to the red zone.

■When moving the shift lever out of P

If the shift lever is pushed sideways before the brake pedal is depressed,

shift lever operation may not be possible. Depress the brake pedal before

shifting the shift lever out of P.

■Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer

If downshifting operations are performed at a vehicle speed by which

downshifting is not possible (when downshifting will cause the engine speed

to enter the red zone), a buzzer will sound to warn the driver that

downshifting cannot be performed.

■When driving with cruise control activated (if equipped)

Downshifting can be performed even when using cruise control. After

downshifting, the set speed continues. (P. 213, 215)

■Sport mode

●In sport mode, lower gears are used and gears change at a higher

engine speed.

●If sport mode is changed to while the shift lever is in the M position, the

“SPORT” indicator will come on but sport mode controls will not be car-

ried out. Shift the shift lever to the D position.

●Sport mode cannot be changed to when driving with cruise control acti-

vated.

■Snow mode

To prevent slipping, 1

gear cannot be selected when in snow mode.

215

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Sport mode and snow mode automatic deactivation

In the following situations, the driving mode is automatically deactivated:

●When the engine is turned off after driving in sport mode or snow mode.

●When cruise control (if equipped) is activated while driving in sport mode.

■If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

P. 477

■Automatic gear selection when the vehicle is stopped

When the vehicle is idling at high rpm in order to warm up, and the vehicle is

on a slippery road, the transmission may automatically shift to 2

gear for

stopping and starting off.

■Temporary manual mode driving (vehicles with paddle shift switches)

: Vehicles with a monochrome multi-information display

: Vehicles with a color multi-information display

Temporary manual mode driving will be deactivated and normal D position

driving will be returned to in the following situations:

●When driving for longer than the set time (the set time differs according

to driving conditions).

●When the vehicle comes to a stop.

●When the accelerator pedal is continually depressed for longer than the

set time.

●When the accelerator pedal is fully, or near-fully, depressed.

Temporary manual mode driving can be

changed to by operating the paddle shift

switches while the shift lever is in the D

position.

When this occurs, the selected gear and

“D” are displayed on the shift position and

shift range indicator.

(When engine speed rises close to the

red zone, upshifting will be automatically

performed.)

Gear Shift Indicator: P. 213

216

2-1. Driving procedures

86_EE (OM18089E)

■AI-SHIFT

The AI-SHIFT automatically shifts the gear to the suitable position according

to the driver performance and driving conditions.

The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D posi-

tion. (Operating the paddle shift switches or shifting the shift lever to the M

position cancels the function.)

WARNING

■When driving on slippery road surfaces

Be careful of downshifting and sudden acceleration, as this could result in

the vehicle skidding to the side or spinning.

■To prevent incorrect operation

Do not attach items such as accessories to the paddle shift switches.

Doing so may unintentionally move the paddle shift switches.

■Gear Shift Indicator

The indication of the gear shift indicator is only as a guideline for driving

more fuel-efficiently. The indicator does not inform the driver about the safe

shift operation timing. The driver has the responsibility for suitable shift oper-

ation depending on the traffic conditions or driving conditions (e.g., overtak-

ing or driving on an uphill slope).

This indicator supports the driver to drive more fuel-efficiently. The vehicle

system determines the shift operation timing depending on the driving condi-

tions, and informs the driver by the indicator on the combination meter. For

details, refer to Gear shift indicator.

217

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Manual Transmission



: If equipped

■Shifting the shift lever

Fully depress the clutch pedal before operating the shift lever, and

then release it slowly.

■Shifting the shift lever to R

Shift the shift lever to R while

lifting up the ring section.

218

2-1. Driving procedures

86_EE (OM18089E)

Shift position indicator

The selected shift position will be

displayed on the multi-informa-

tion display.

The selected shift position will not

appear in the following situations:

• When the shift lever is in N.

• When the vehicle speed is 10

km/h (6 mph) or less (except

when the shift lever is in R).

• When the clutch pedal is

depressed.

: Vehicles with a monochrome multi-information display

: Vehicles with a color multi-information display

Gear Shift Indicator

The Gear Shift Indicator display is a guide to help the driver achieve

improved fuel economy and reduced exhaust emissions within limits

of engine performance.

Upshift indicator

Downshift indicator

The Gear Shift Indicator cannot

be deactivated.

: Vehicles with a monochrome multi-information display

: Vehicles with a color multi-information display

219

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Gear Shift Indicator display

●The Gear Shift Indicator may not be displayed when your foot is placed

on the clutch pedal.

●The Gear Shift Indicator may operate to prevent a possible engine stall at

a low engine speed.

WARNING

■Gear Shift Indicator

The indication of the gear shift indicator is only as a guideline for driving

more fuel-efficiently. The indicator does not inform the driver about the safe

shift operation timing. The driver has the responsibility for suitable shift oper-

ation depending on the traffic conditions or driving conditions (e.g., overtak-

ing or driving on an uphill slope).

This indicator supports the driver to drive more fuel-efficiently. The vehicle

system determines the shift operation timing depending on the driving condi-

tions, and informs the driver by the indicator on the combination meter. For

details, refer to Gear shift indicator.

Usually, the gear shift indicator is a guideline for driving more fuel-efficiently,

and it also may operate to prevent a possible stall at a low engine speed.

220

2-1. Driving procedures

86_EE (OM18089E)

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the transmission

●Do not lift up the ring section except when shifting the lever to R.

●Shift the shift lever to R only when the vehicle is stationary and the clutch

pedal is fully depressed.

●Do not shift the shift lever without

depressing the clutch pedal.

221

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Turn signal lever

■Turn signals can be operated when

Vehicles without a smart entry & start system

The engine switch is in the “ON” position.

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■If the indicators flash faster than usual

Check that a light bulb in the turn signal lights has not burned out.

The turn signal lever can be used to show the following intentions of

the driver:

Right turn

Left turn

Lane change to the right

(push and hold the lever

partway)

The right hand signals will

flash until you release the

lever.

Lane change to the left

(push and hold the lever

partway)

The left hand signals will flash

until you release the lever.

222

2-1. Driving procedures

86_EE (OM18089E)

Parking brake

■Usage in winter time

P. 283

NOTICE

■Before driving

Fully release the parking brake.

Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components

overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake

wear.

To set the parking brake, fully pull the parking brake lever while

depressing the brake pedal.

To release the parking brake, slightly raise the lever and lower it

completely while pressing the button.

223

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Horn

■After adjusting the steering wheel

Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.

The horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked.

(P. 100)

To sound the horn, press on or

close to the mark.

224

86_EE (OM18089E)

2-2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters

The illustration below is for left-hand drive vehicles.

The switch positions may differ slightly for right-hand drive vehi-

cles.

With monochrome display

With color display

Type A Type B

225

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Analog Speedometer

Displays the vehicle speed.

Tachometer

Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.

Fuel gauge

Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.

Engine coolant temperature gauge (if equipped)

Displays the engine coolant temperature.

Digital Speedometer (if equipped)

Displays the vehicle speed.

Multi-information display, odometer and trip meter

P. 234, 239

“DISP” switch (if equipped)

P. 237

“ODO/TRIP” switch

P. 236, 240

“km/h MPH” switch (if equipped)

Each time the switch is pressed, the display inside the meter changes

between km/h and MPH.

226

2-2. Instrument cluster

86_EE (OM18089E)

Instrument panel light control

The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.

Brighter

Darker

■The meters and display illuminate when

Vehicles without a smart entry & start system

The engine switch is in the “ON” position.

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■The brightness of the instrument panel lights

When the front position lights or the headlights turn on, the instrument panel

lights will dim. However, when the instrument panel brightness control dial is

turned to the up most position, the instrument panel lights will not dim even

when the front position lights or headlights turn on.

227

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the engine and its components

●Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which

indicates the maximum engine speed.

●In the following situations, the engine may be overheating. In this case,

immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after it

has cooled completely. (



P. 488)

• Vehicles with a monochrome multi-information display: The engine

coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone

• Vehicles with a color multi-information display: The high engine coolant

temperature warning light flashes or illuminates

228

2-2. Instrument cluster

86_EE (OM18089E)

Indicators and warning lights

The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and cen-

ter panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various sys-

tems.

For the purpose of explanation, the following illustration displays all

indicators and warning lights illuminated.

Instrument cluster (with monochrome display)

Instrument cluster (with color display)

229

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Center panel

230

2-2. Instrument cluster

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Indicators

The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the

vehicle’s various systems.

Turn signal indicator

(P. 221)

Shift position indicator

(P. 218)

(Vehicles with a manual transmission)

Headlight high beam

indicator (P. 256)

Gear Shift Indicator

(P. 218)

(Vehicles with a manual transmission)

Front fog light indicator

(P. 261)

(Blue)

(If equipped)

Low engine coolant

temperature indicator

Rear fog light indicator

(P. 261)

Slip indicator

(P. 271)

Security indicator

(P. 113)

Hill-start assist control

ON indicator (P. 277)

(If equipped)

Smart entry & start sys-

tem indicator (P. 198)

“TRC OFF” indicator

(P. 271)

Shift position and shift

range indicator

(P. 211 )

VSC off indicator

(P. 272)

(Vehicles with an automatic transmission)

Gear Shift Indicator

(P. 213, 215) “TRACK” indicator

(P. 272)

(Vehicles with an automatic transmission)

“SPORT” indicator

(P. 212)

(If equipped)

REV indicator

(P. 188)

(Vehicles with an automatic transmission)

“SNOW” indicator

(P. 212)

(Green)

(If equipped)

Cruise control indicator

(P. 265)

(Vehicles with an automatic transmission)

1, 3

231

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

:Vehicles without a smart entry & start system

These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON”

position to indicate that a system check is being performed. They

will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There

may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if

the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by any autho-

rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional for details.

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system

These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is

turned to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is

being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or

after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a

light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehi-

cle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional for details.

: This indicator turns on when the engine coolant temperature is low.

: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.

: When the outside temperature is approximately 3°C (37°F) or lower,

the indicator will illuminate.

(If equipped)

“SET” indicator

(P. 265)

Airbag man-

ual on-off

indicator

(P. 180)

(If equipped)

Low outside tempera-

ture indicator (P. 252)

232

2-2. Instrument cluster

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Warning lights

Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the

vehicle’s systems. (P. 419, 428)

:Vehicles without a smart entry & start system

These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON”

position to indicate that a system check is being performed. They

will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There

may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if

the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by any autho-

rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional for details.

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system

These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is

turned to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is

being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or

after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a

light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehi-

cle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional for details.

: The light flashes in yellow to indicate a malfunction. The light

flashes quickly in green to indicate that the steering lock has not

been released.

: The light comes on in yellow to indicate a malfunction.

(Red)

(If equipped)

(Yellow)

(If equipped)

(Yellow)

(If equipped)

(for driver) (for the

front pas-

senger)

(If equipped) (If equipped)

233

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■If a safety system warning light does not come on

Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not

come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are

not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death

or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional immediately

if this occurs.

: Vehicles with a monochrome multi-information display only: This

light turns on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position

to indicate that a system check is being performed. It will turn off

after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a

malfunction in a system if the light does not come on or turn off.

Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer for details.

234

2-2. Instrument cluster

86_EE (OM18089E)

Multi-information display (monochrome display)

The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of

driving-related data, such as the current outside temperature. The

multi-information display can also be used to change the meter set-

tings.

●Odometer

●Trip meter

●Outside temperature

●Current fuel consumption

●Average fuel consumption

235

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Switch the display

Pressing the “ODO/TRIP” switch or “DISP” switch displays the follow-

ing information respectively:

“ODO/TRIP” switch

• Odometer

•Trip meter

“DISP” switch

• Outside temperature

• Current fuel consumption

• Average fuel consumption

236

2-2. Instrument cluster

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Changing the display using the “ODO/TRIP” switch

Each time the “ODO/TRIP” switch is pressed, the display changes as

follows.

Odometer

Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

Trip meter

Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was

last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different

distances independently.

*: Pressing and holding the “ODO/TRIP” switch will reset the trip meter that

is currently displayed.

237

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Changing the display using the “DISP” switch

Each time the “DISP” switch is pressed, the display changes as fol-

lows.

Outside temperature

Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°C (-40°F) to

50°C (122°F).

Current fuel consumption

Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.

Average fuel consumption

Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset.

• The function can be reset by pushing the “DISP” switch for longer than

one second when the average fuel consumption is displayed.

• Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.

238

2-2. Instrument cluster

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Outside temperature display

●In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be

displayed.

• When the vehicle is very hot, such as when under the sun.

• When the vehicle is idling or being driven at low speeds such as in a

traffic jam or when the engine is stopped and then restarted immedi-

ately afterward.

• When the actual outside temperature is outside of the indicator range.

●If “” is displayed for approximately 1 minute or more or if the outside

temperature is not displayed, the system may be malfunctioning. Have

the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional.

WARNING

■The information display at low temperatures

Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal

information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display

monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.

For example, there is a lag between the driver's shifting and the new shift

position number appearing on the display. In this case, wait until the display

changes and take care not to downshift again, causing rapid and excessive

engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

239

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Multi-information display (color display)

Summary of functions

The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of driv-

ing-related data, such as the current outside temperature. The multi-

information display can also be used to change the meter settings.

Meter control switches (P. 240)

“ODO/TRIP” switch (P. 240)

Menu icons (P. 241)

The menu icon bar will be displayed momentarily when the meter control

switch is used to change the displayed content.

Content display area

A variety of information can be displayed by selecting a menu icon. Addi-

tionally, a warning message will be displayed in some situations.

• Menu icon content (P. 241)

• Warning message (P. 251, 428)

Odometer/trip meter display area (P. 252)

Displays the following items:

• Odometer/trip meter

• Outside temperature

240

2-2. Instrument cluster

86_EE (OM18089E)

Using the multi-information display

■Using the content display area

The content display area is operated using the meter control

switches.

: Select menu icons

: Change displayed

content, scroll up/

down the screen

and move the cursor

: Enter

: Return to the previ-

ous screen

For information pertaining to the content of each menu icon, refer to

the explanation of each item under the heading of the relevant menu

icon.

■Using the odometer/trip meter display area

Items in this area are operated using the “ODO/TRIP” switch.

Press: Change displayed item

Each time the switch is pressed,

the displayed item changes in the

order of odometer  trip meter A

 trip meter B.

Press and hold: Reset

Display the desired trip meter and

press and hold the switch to reset

the trip meter.

241

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Menu icons

Select a menu icon to display its content.

Drive information (P. 242)

Select to display various drive data.

Exclusive content for 86 (P. 244)

Select to display the G-force display, stopwatch, and other useful

functions for sporty driving.

Settings display (P. 249)

Select to change the meter display settings.

Warning message display (P. 251, 428)

Select to display warning messages and measures to be taken if a

malfunction is detected.

242

2-2. Instrument cluster

86_EE (OM18089E)

Drive information ( )

■Drive information (page 1)

Current fuel consumption

Displays the current rate of fuel

consumption.

Average fuel consumption

Displays the average fuel con-

sumption since the function was

reset.

Driving range

Displays the estimated maximum

distance that can be driven with

the quantity of fuel remaining.

●Pressing and holding will reset the average fuel consump-

tion.

●Use the displayed fuel consumption as a reference.

●This distance is computed based on your average fuel con-

sumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may

differ from that displayed.

●When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the dis-

play may not be updated.

When refueling, turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off. If

the vehicle is refueled without turning the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch off, the display may not be updated.

243

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Drive information (page 2)

Average vehicle speed

Displays the average vehicle

speed since display was reset.

Driving time

Displays the cumulative time the

vehicle has been driven since dis-

play was reset.

Driving distance

Displays the cumulative distance

the vehicle has been driven since

display was reset.

●Pressing and holding will reset the average vehicle speed/

driving time/driving distance.

■Drive information (page 3)

Engine coolant temperature

gauge

Displays the engine coolant tem-

perature.

If the engine coolant temperature

gauge needle/indicator enters the

red zone, a buzzer will sound and

a warning message will be dis-

played.

Engine oil temperature gauge

Displays the engine oil tempera-

ture.

Voltmeter

Displays the charging voltage.

As voltage displayed may

be different from the actual

battery voltage, use the volt-

meter as a guideline.

244

2-2. Instrument cluster

86_EE (OM18089E)

●Pressing and holding will turn the range value display on the

engine coolant temperature gauge display on/off.

Exclusive content for 86 ( )

■G-force

Displays lateral G-forces on the vehicle

Also displays, around the periphery of the G-force display, the left and

right steering amount, accelerator pedal input, and brake fluid pres-

sure

The following 2 screens are available for displaying G-force

• Normal display screen: Suitable for confirming current lateral G-forces on

the vehicle

• Peak-hold display screen: Suitable for confirming the size and direction of

the maximum lateral G-forces on the vehicle

245

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

●Reading the display

Record of the maximum G-

forces

• Displayed on the peak-hold

display screen only

• To reset the record of maxi-

mum G-forces, press and hold

while the peak-hold display

screen is displayed.

Current G-force value (ana-

lyzed value of front/rear and

left/right G-forces)

G-force values that can be dis-

played

Front/Rear: Up to 1.3 G

Left/Right: Up to 2.5 G

G-force ball trace

The maximum number of ball

trace segments for the normal

display screen is 20 and 10 for

the peak-hold display screen.

G-force ball (acceleration G-

forces on the vehicle)

246

2-2. Instrument cluster

86_EE (OM18089E)

Scale of the G-force display

The scale of the record of the

maximum G-forces and G-force

ball trace can be changed

between 1.0 G and 0.5 G by

pressing and holding while

the normal display screen is dis-

played.

Accelerator pedal input

Brake fluid pressure

Steering amount

If the steering wheel is turned

completely to the left or right, the

bottom side of the gauge on the

corresponding side will be illumi-

nated in red.

This display is intended for use as a guideline. Depending on factors such as

the road surface condition, temperature and vehicle speed, the display may

not show the actual condition of the vehicle.

■Power and torque curve

Power output

Torque

Current engine speed

The vertical bar will slide laterally

according to the current engine

speed.

This chart is intended for reference only and does not show the actual

engine torque or output.

247

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Stopwatch

Measures and displays current lap time and previous lap times

Fastest lap time (top screen)

When the timer is reset, “’”” will be displayed.

Fastest lap time (measurement screen)

Current lap time

Total lap time

Past lap times

Records of the 50 most recent lap times will be displayed.

Meter control switch operation guide

●Changing between the stopwatch screens

To change to the measurement screen: Press .

To change to the top screen: Press .

Top screen Measurement screen

248

2-2. Instrument cluster

86_EE (OM18089E)

●Operating the measurement screen

: Start/stop measure-

ment

: Mark off one lap

: Reset measured lap

times

: Scroll through the

lap times

●Resetting measured lap times

After stopping the measurement, press .

●To display other content while the stopwatch is operating

If the measurement screen is displayed, press to display the

top screen. Then operate the meter control switches to display

other content. While other items are displayed, the measurement

will continue but the stopwatch cannot be operated.

249

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Settings display ( )

Use the meter control switches on the steering wheel to change set-

tings.

Press or to select .

Operate the switches to select a desired item.

Press / or / to change the setting and then

press to confirm the change.

Item Settings Details

Welcome screen

On Select to enable/disable the welcome

screen when the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION

ON mode.

Off

REV.

RPM

--00 rpm

(OFF) ~

7400 rpm

Select to enable/disable the REV indi-

cator and set the engine speed at

which the REV indicator will be illumi-

nated.

To disable, select “--” for the engine

speed (--00 rpm)

Selectable engine speed range: 2000

to 7400 rpm

Buzzer

On Select to enable/disable the sounding

of a buzzer when the REV indicator is

illuminated. This setting can be

changed only when the REV indicator

is enabled.

Off

STEP

250

2-2. Instrument cluster

86_EE (OM18089E)

*: If equipped

Language

English

Select to change the language dis-

played.

French

Spanish

German*

Italian*

Russian

Chinese*

Turkish*

Units

km, km/h,

km/l

Select to change the units of measure

displayed.

km, km/h,

l/100km

miles,

MPH,

MPG*

Initialization Yes Select to reset the meter display set-

tings to the default setting.

Item Settings Details

251

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Warning message ( )

Select to display warning messages related to situations such as a

vehicle malfunction.

●If there is more than one message to be displayed, press /

to change the display.

●If there are no warning mes-

sages to be displayed, a mes-

sage indicating so will be

displayed.

252

2-2. Instrument cluster

86_EE (OM18089E)

Odometer/trip meter display area

■Odometer

Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

■Trip meter A/trip meter B

Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter

was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display

different distances independently.

To reset, display the desired trip meter and press and hold the “ODO/

TRIP” switch.

■Outside temperature

Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°C (-40°F) to

50°C (122°F). Low outside temperature indicator comes on when the

ambient temperature is 3°C (37°F) or lower.

253

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

■G-force display

●Depending on the vehicle usage conditions, the brake fluid pressure dis-

play may not reach its maximum reading even though the brake pedal is

fully depressed.

●If a battery terminal is disconnected and reconnected, the steering

amount display may be disabled temporarily. After driving the vehicle for

a while, the display will be enabled.

■Suspension of the settings display

●The settings cannot be changed while driving. When changing settings,

park the vehicle in a safe place.

●If a warning message is displayed, operation of the settings display will

be suspended.

■Using the stopwatch

If the engine is stopped while the stopwatch is operating, the stopwatch will

stop and the time up to that point will be recorded.

■Outside temperature display

●In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be

displayed.

• When the vehicle is very hot, such as when under the sun.

• When the vehicle is idling or being driven at low speeds such as in a

traffic jam or when the engine is stopped and then restarted immedi-

ately afterward.

• When the actual outside temperature is outside of the indicator range.

●If “” is displayed for approximately 1 minute or more or if the outside

temperature is not displayed, the system may be malfunctioning. Have

the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional.

254

2-2. Instrument cluster

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Liquid crystal display

Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is

characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to

use the display.

WARNING

■Caution for use while driving

●When operating the multi-information display while driving, pay extra

attention to the safety of the area around the vehicle.

●Do not look continuously at the multi-information display while driving as

you may fail to see pedestrians, objects on the road, etc. ahead of the

vehicle.

■The information display at low temperatures

Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal

information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display

monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.

For example, there is a lag between the driver’s shifting and the new gear

number appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to

downshift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly

an accident resulting in death or injury.

■Cautions during setting up the display

As the engine needs to be running during setting up the display, ensure that

the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area

such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO)

may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health

hazard.

NOTICE

■While setting up the display

To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while setting

up the display features.

255

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Headlight switch

The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.

Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:

Off

The daytime running lights

turn on. (P. 257)

The headlights, front

position/daytime run-

ning lights (P. 257)

and so on turn on and

off automatically. (Vehi-

cles without a smart

entry & start system:

When the engine

switch is in the “ON”

position

Vehicles with a smart

entry & start system:

When the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch is

in IGNITION ON mode)

The front position, tail,

license plate and instru-

ment panel lights turn

on.

The headlights and all

the lights listed above

(except daytime run-

ning lights) turn on.

(if equipped)

256

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

86_EE (OM18089E)

Turning on the high beam headlights

With the headlights on, push

the lever forward to turn on the

high beams.

Pull the lever back to the center

position to turn the high beams

off.

Pull the lever toward you and

release it to flash the high

beams once.

You can flash the high beams

with the headlights on or off.

257

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Daytime running light system

●Vehicles with an automatic transmission: To make your vehicle more visi-

ble to other drivers during daytime driving, the daytime running lights turn

on automatically whenever the engine is started and the parking brake is

released with the headlight switch off or in the “AUTO” position. (Illumi-

nate brighter than the front position lights.) Daytime running lights are not

designed for use at night.

●Vehicles with a manual transmission: To make your vehicle more visible

to other drivers during daytime driving, the daytime running lights turn on

automatically whenever the engine is started and the parking brake is

released with the headlight switch off or in the “AUTO” position. (Illumi-

nate brighter than the front position lights.) Daytime running lights are not

designed for use at night.

■Headlight control sensor (if equipped)

Headlight control sensor is located on the

passenger's side.

The sensor may not function properly if

an object is placed on the sensor, or any-

thing that blocks the sensor is affixed to

the windshield.

Doing so interferes with the sensor

detecting the level of ambient light and

may cause the automatic headlight sys-

tem to malfunction.

258

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Automatic light off system (if equipped)

Vehicles without a smart entry & start system

When the light switch is in or

: The headlights turn off auto-

matically if the key is removed from the engine switch.

To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to the “ON” position, or

turn the light switch off once and then back to

or .

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system

When the light switch is in or

: The headlights turn off auto-

matically if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off.

To turn the lights on again, turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNI-

TION ON mode, or turn the light switch off once and then back to

■Light reminder buzzer

Vehicles without a smart entry & start system

A buzzer sounds when the engine switch is turned to “LOCK” position and

the driver's door is opened with the key removed from the engine switch

while the lights are turned on.

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system

A buzzer sounds when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off and

the driver's door is opened while the lights are turned on.

■Automatic headlight leveling system

The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number

of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the

headlights do not interfere with other road users.

259

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Battery-saving function (if equipped)

In the following conditions, the headlights and the other remaining lights will

go off automatically after 20 minutes in order to prevent the vehicle battery

from being discharged:

●The headlights and/or tail lights are on.

●The key is removed from the engine switch (vehicles without a smart

entry & start system) or the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off

(vehicles with a smart entry & start system).

●The light switch is in or .

This function will be canceled in any of the following situations:

●When the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without a

smart entry & start system) or the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is

turned to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart entry & start sys-

tem)

●When the light switch is operated

●When the door is opened or closed

260

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Turning on the low beam headlights when the vehicle is parked in dark

areas

■Customization that can be configured at any authorized Toyota dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional

Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.

(Customizable features P. 5 11 )

NOTICE

■To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not run-

ning.

Turn off the engine with the light switch

in or off, and pull the light switch

toward you and release it. The low

beam headlights will turn on for about

30 seconds to light up the area around

the vehicle.

The lights are turned off in the following

situations.

●Vehicles without a smart entry &

start system: The engine switch is

turned to the “ON” position.

●Vehicles with a smart entry & start

system: The “ENGINE START

STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION

ON mode.

●The light switch is turned on.

●The light switch is pulled toward you

and then released.

261

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Fog light switch

■Fog lights can be used when

Front fog lights: The headlights or front position lights are turned on.

Rear fog lights: The front fog lights are turned on.

The fog lights secure excellent visibility in difficult driving condi-

tions, such as in rain and fog.

Turns the front and rear fog

lights off

Turns the front fog lights on

Turns both front and rear

fog lights on

Releasing the switch ring

returns it to .

Operating the switch ring again

turns only the rear fog lights

off.

262

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

86_EE (OM18089E)

Windshield wipers and washer

When intermittent windshield wiper operation is selected, the wiper

interval can be adjusted.

The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows.

Intermittent windshield

wiper operation

Low speed windshield wiper

operation

High speed windshield

wiper operation

Temporary operation

Decreases the intermittent

windshield wiper frequency

Increases the intermittent

windshield wiper frequency

263

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

■The windshield wipers and washer can be operated when

Vehicles without a smart entry & start system

The engine switch is in the “ON” position.

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■If no windshield washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the

windshield washer fluid tank.

WARNING

■Caution regarding the use of washer fluid

When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes

warm. The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This

may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

Washer/wiper dual opera-

tion

The wipers will automatically

operate a couple of times after

the washer squirts.

When the headlights are on

and the lever is pulled and

held, the headlight cleaners

will operate once.

264

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

86_EE (OM18089E)

NOTICE

■When the windshield is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.

■When the washer fluid tank is empty

Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may over-

heat.

■When a nozzle becomes blocked

In this case, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional.

Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.

265

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

2-4. Using other driving systems

Cruise control



Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing

the accelerator pedal.

Indicators

Cruise control switch

■Setting the vehicle speed

Press the “ON-OFF” button to

activate the cruise control.

Cruise control indicator (green)

will come on.

Press the button again to

deactivate the cruise control.

Accelerate or decelerate the

vehicle to the desired speed,

and push the lever down to set

the speed.

“SET” indicator will come on.

The vehicle speed at the

moment the lever is released

becomes the set speed.

STEP



: If equipped

266

2-4. Using other driving systems

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Adjusting the set speed

To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set

speed is obtained.

Increases the speed

Decreases the speed

Fine adjustment: Momentarily

move the lever in the desired

direction.

Large adjustment: Hold the

lever in the desired direction.

The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:

Fine adjustment (vehicles with a km/h odometer display): By approxi-

mately 1 km/h (0.6 mph) each time the lever is operated.

Fine adjustment (vehicles with an mph odometer display): By approxi-

mately 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time the lever is operated.

Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased con-

tinually until the lever is released.

267

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Cruise control can be set when

Vehicles with an automatic transmission

●The shift lever is in D or M and the vehicle is in the 2

gear or higher.

●Vehicle speed is above approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

Vehicles with a manual transmission

●The vehicle is in the 2

gear or higher.

●Vehicle speed is above approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

■Canceling and resuming the constant speed control

Pulling the lever toward you

cancels the constant speed

control.

The speed setting is also

canceled when the brakes are

applied or the clutch pedal

(manual transmission only) is

depressed.

Pushing the lever up

resumes the constant

speed control.

Resuming is available when

the vehicle speed is more than

approximately 32 km/h (20

mph).

268

2-4. Using other driving systems

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed

●The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set

speed resumes.

●Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be

increased by first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then

pushing the lever down to set the new speed.

■Automatic cruise control cancelation

Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following

situations.

●Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 32 km/h (20 mph).

●VSC is activated.

■The system may be malfunctioning when

In the following situations, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehi-

cle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional.

●The cruise control indicator light comes on in yellow.

●The cruise control indicator does not come on even when the “ON-OFF”

button is pressed while the engine is running.

269

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake

Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.

■Situations unsuitable for cruise control

Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.

Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting

in death or serious injury.

●In heavy traffic

●On roads with sharp bends

●On winding roads

●On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow

●On steep hills

Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.

●During emergency towing

270

2-4. Using other driving systems

86_EE (OM18089E)

Driving assist systems

To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following sys-

tems operate automatically in response to various driving situations.

Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and

should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.

■ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if

the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface

■Brake assist

Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is

depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation

■VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)

Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning

on slippery road surfaces

■TRC (Traction Control)

Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spin-

ning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.

The TRC system is also equipped with the brake LSD function.

■Hill-start assist control



P. 277

■EPS (Electric Power Steering)

Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn

the steering wheel

■Emergency brake signal

When the brakes are applied suddenly, the emergency flashers auto-

matically flash quickly to alert the vehicle behind.

271

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

When the TRC/VSC systems are operating

The slip indicator light will flash

while the TRC (brake LSD func-

tion)/VSC systems are operat-

ing.

Disabling the TRC system

If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt or snow, the TRC system may

reduce power from the engine to the wheels. Pressing to turn

the system off may make it easier for you to rock the vehicle in order

to free it.

In this case, the brake LSD function remains on.

To turn the TRC system off,

quickly press and release the

button.

The “TRC OFF” indicator light will

come on.

Press the button again to turn the

system back on.

272

2-4. Using other driving systems

86_EE (OM18089E)

“TRACK” mode

Your vehicle is equipped with two types of control modes to accom-

modate various driving preferences. The control modes can be

selected with the “TRACK” switch. Normal mode allows secure and

smooth normal driving. When the switch is pressed and held for 1

second or more, “TRACK” mode is activated. Control characteristics

such as the VSC and TRC are adjusted to afford maneuverability

closer to what a driver may desire, while a sense of security is

retained.

“TRACK” mode/Normal mode

The “TRACK” indicator and VSC

off indicator come on when in

“TRACK” mode.

To change back to normal mode

while in “TRACK” mode, press

or the “TRACK” switch.

Turning off both TRC and VSC systems

To turn the TRC and VSC systems off, press and hold for more

than 3 seconds while the vehicle is stopped.

The “TRC OFF” indicator light and the VSC off indicator light will

come on.

However, on vehicles with an automatic transmission, the brake LSD

function will remain on.

Press the button again to turn the systems back on.

273

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Selecting TRC mode and VSC mode

Modes can be selected to suit your driving conditions as follows:

Vehicles with an automatic transmission

Vehicles with a manual transmission

Driving

conditions

TRC

modes VSC modes Brake LSD

function Indicator lights

Normal

roads

Normal

mode

Normal

mode

Normal

mode 

Rough

roads Off Normal

mode

Normal

mode

Sport

driving

“TRACK”

mode

“TRACK”

mode

“TRACK”

mode

Off Off

“TRACK”

mode*

Off*

■Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, TRC and VSC

systems

●A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the brake

pedal is depressed repeatedly, when the engine is started or just after the

vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction

has occurred in any of these systems.

●Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are

operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.

• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.

• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.

• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.

• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.

■EPS operation sound

When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may

be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.

274

2-4. Using other driving systems

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Automatic reactivation of TRC and VSC systems

After turning the TRC and VSC systems off, the systems will be automati-

cally reactivated in the following situations:

●Vehicles without a smart entry & start system: When the engine switch is

turned to “LOCK” position

●Vehicles with a smart entry & start system: When the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch is turned off

●If only the TRC system is turned off, the TRC will turn on when vehicle

speed is more than approximately 50 km/h (31 mph).

If both the TRC and VSC systems are turned off, automatic reactivation

will not occur when vehicle speed increases.

■Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system

The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from

overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of

time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur,

refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the engine

off. The EPS system should return to normal after a little while.

■Automatic deactivation of “TRACK” mode

Vehicles without a smart entry & start system

When the engine switch is turned to “LOCK” position after driving in

“TRACK” mode, the mode is automatically deactivated.

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system

When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off after driving in

“TRACK” mode, the mode is automatically deactivated.

■Operating conditions of emergency brake signal

When the following three conditions are met, the emergency brake signal

will operate:

●The emergency flashers are off.

●Actual vehicle speed is over 60 km/h (38 mph).

●The brake pedal is depressed in a manner that cause the system to

judge from the vehicle deceleration that this is a sudden braking opera-

tion.

275

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Automatic system cancelation of emergency brake signal

The emergency brake signal will turn off in any of the following situations:

●The emergency flashers are turned on.

●The brake pedal is released.

●The system judges from the vehicle deceleration that is not a sudden

braking operation.

■Customization that can be configured at your Toyota dealer

Settings (e.g. emergency brake signal) can be changed.

(Customizable features P. 5 11 )

WARNING

■The ABS does not operate effectively when

●Tires with inadequate gripping ability are used (such as excessively worn

tires on a snow covered road).

●The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick roads.

■Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of nor-

mal conditions

The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always

maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situ-

ations:

●When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads

●When driving with tire chains

●When driving over bumps in the road

●When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces

■TRC may not operate effectively when

Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slip-

pery road surfaces, even if the TRC system is operating.

Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.

276

2-4. Using other driving systems

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■When the VSC and/or brake LSD function is activated

The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may

cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.

■When the TRC/VSC systems are turned off

Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road condi-

tions. As these are the systems to help ensure vehicle stability and driving

force, do not turn the TRC/VSC systems off unless necessary.

■Replacing tires

Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and

total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the

recommended tire inflation pressure level.

The ABS, TRC and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires

are installed on the vehicle.

Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional for further information when replacing tires or

wheels.

■Handling of tires and suspension

Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect

the driving assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction.

277

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Hill-start assist control

Hill-start assist control helps to maintain braking force to assist

starting off forward while facing uphill or starting off backward while

facing downhill. As hill-start assist control is initially disabled,

enable the system to make it operable. The enabled/disabled setting

will be maintained the next time the engine is started.

The hill-start assist control ON

indicator will be illuminated

when system is enabled and

flash while the system is oper-

ating.

■Enabling hill-start assist control

Park your vehicle in a flat, safe location.

Make sure that the parking brake is securely engaged.

Stop the engine by turning the engine switch to the “LOCK”

position (vehicles without a smart entry & start system) or

turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off (vehicles

with a smart entry & start system).

Start the engine and check that the ABS warning light and

slip indicator are off.

Press and hold for

approximately 30 seconds.

Check that both the VSC off

indicator and “TRC OFF” indi-

cator illuminate and then turn

off.

STEP

278

2-4. Using other driving systems

86_EE (OM18089E)

■When enabling the hill-start assist control

●If the hill-start assist control ON indicator does not illuminate or if an

incorrect operation is performed, turn the engine switch to the “LOCK”

position (vehicles without a smart entry & start system) or turn the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch off (vehicles with a smart entry & start

system) and then restart the enabling procedure from .

●If is pressed and held for approximately 30 seconds or more, the

VSC off indicator and “TRC OFF” indicator will turn off and subsequent

operations of the switch will be rejected. In this case, the VSC system will

operate in normal mode. (P. 273) To enable , turn the engine

switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position (vehicles without a smart entry &

start system) or turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off (vehicles

with a smart entry & start system) and then restart the engine.

Within 5 seconds after the indicator lights turn off, release

. Then, press the switch again within 2 seconds of

releasing it.

The hill-start assist control ON indicator will illuminate and then

turn off.

Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position (vehicles

without a smart entry & start system) or turn the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch off (vehicles with a smart entry &

start system). Then, restart the engine and check that the

hill-start assist control ON indicator is illuminated.

Hill-start assist control is enabled when the indicator is illumi-

nated.

To disable hill-start assist control, perform the above

through again.

STEP

279

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Operating conditions of hill-start assist control

When the following conditions are met, the hill-start assist control will oper-

ate:

●Vehicles with an automatic transmission: The shift lever is in D or M

(when starting off forward on while facing uphill) or in R (when starting off

backward while facing downhill).

●Vehicles with a manual transmission: The shift lever is in a position other

than R (when starting off forward while facing uphill) or in R (when start-

ing off backward while facing downhill).

●The vehicle is stopped.

●The accelerator pedal is not depressed.

●The parking brake is not engaged.

■Hill-start assist control will not operate when

Hill-start assist control will not operate when any of the following conditions

are met:

●Vehicles with an automatic transmission: The shift lever is in a position

other than D or M (when facing uphill) or in a position other than R (when

facing downhill).

●Vehicles with a manual transmission: The shift lever is in R (when facing

uphill) or in a position other than R (when facing downhill).

●Vehicles with an automatic transmission: The accelerator pedal is

depressed.

●The parking brake is applied.

●Vehicles with a manual transmission: The clutch is engaged.

●Approximately 2 seconds have elapsed since the brake pedal was

released.

●The hill-start assist control ON indicator is not illuminated.

●Vehicles without a smart entry & start system: The engine switch is

turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

●Vehicles with a smart entry & start system: The “ENGINE START STOP”

switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off.

280

2-4. Using other driving systems

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Notes for hill-start assist control

●A slight jolt may be felt when starting off backward with the shift lever in R

and then moving forward.

●If the braking power of hill-start assist control is insufficient, depress the

brake pedal.

●While the vehicle is stopped, make sure to depress the brake pedal.

■The system may be malfunctioning when

In the following situations, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehi-

cle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

●The slip indicator is illuminated.

●The hill-start assist control ON indicator turns off and a buzzer sounds.

WARNING

■Hill-start assist control precautions

●Do not overly rely on hill-start assist control. Hill-start assist control may

not operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered with ice.

●Unlike the parking brake, hill-start assist control is not intended to hold the

vehicle stationary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use

hill-start assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline, as doing so may

lead to an accident.

●Do not stop the engine while hill-start assist control is operating, as hill-

start assist control will stop operating, possibly leading to an accident.

281

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

2-5. Driving information

Cargo and luggage

WARNING

■Things that must not be carried in the trunk

The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk:

●Receptacles containing gasoline

●Aerosol cans

Take notice of the following information about storage precautions,

cargo capacity and load:

●Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible.

●Be sure all items are secured in place.

●To maintain vehicle balance while driving, position luggage

evenly within the luggage compartment.

●For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.

282

2-5. Driving information

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■Storage precautions

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

●

Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible.

●

To prevent cargo and luggage from sliding forward during braking, do

not stack anything in the enlarged trunk. Keep cargo and luggage low,

as close to the floor as possible.

●

When you fold down the rear seats, long items should not be placed

directly behind the front seats.

●

Never allow anyone to ride in the enlarged trunk. It is not designed for

passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts prop-

erly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer death or

serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving

or an accident.

●

Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the

item may get under the clutch, brake or accelerator pedal and prevent

the pedals from being depressed properly, block the driver’s vision, or

hit the driver or passengers, causing an accident:

• At the feet of the driver

• On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)

• On the package tray

• On the instrument panel

• On the dashboard

●

Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and

injure someone during sudden braking, sudden swerving or an acci-

dent.

■Load and distribution

●Do not overload your vehicle.

●Do not apply loads unevenly.

Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control

which may cause death or serious injury.

283

2-5. Driving information

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Winter driving tips

Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving

the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropri-

ate to the prevailing weather conditions.

■Pre-winter preparations

●Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside tem-

peratures.

• Engine oil

• Washer fluid

●Have a service technician inspect the condition of the battery.

●Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set

of tire chains for the rear tires.

Make sure to install 4 tires that are of the specified size, and that all

4 tires are the same size, same maker, same brand and tread pat-

tern. Also, make sure to use tire chains that match the size of the

tires.

■Before driving the vehicle

Perform the following according to the driving conditions.

●Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is

frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice.

Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.

●To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,

remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents

in front of the windshield.

●Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have

accumulated on the exterior lights, vehicle's roof, chassis,

around the tires or on the brakes.

●Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes

before getting in the vehicle.

284

2-5. Driving information

86_EE (OM18089E)

●If a door is opened and closed when its side window is frozen,

the window safety device will operate and the side window

open/close function linked to door operation may not operate

correctly. If this occurs, perform the following after the ice has

melted.

Open the side window until it is approximately halfway open

with the door closed.

Fully close the window by pulling the switch up to the one-

touch closing position and continue holding the switch for 1

second or more after the window fully closes.

The window position is reset and the safety device operations will

be released.

■When driving the vehicle

Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you

and the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to

road conditions.

■When parking the vehicle (in the winter time or in the cold

latitudes)

Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P (automatic trans-

mission) or 1 or R (manual transmission) without setting the

parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it

from being released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent

inadvertent sliding or creeping.

STEP

285

2-5. Driving information

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Selecting tire chains

We recommend that you consult any authorized Toyota dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional for infor-

mation about the chains that you can use.

Regulations on the use of tire chains

Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to loca-

tion and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing

chains.

■Tire chains

Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains.

●Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.

●Install tire chains on the rear tires. Do not install tire chains on front tires.

●Install tire chains on rear tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains

after driving approximately 100 m (328 ft.).

●Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.

WARNING

■Driving with snow tires

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or

serious injury.

●Use tires of the specified size, and that are the same size, same maker,

same brand and tread pattern.

●Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.

●Do not drive at speeds in excess of the speed limit or the speed limit spec-

ified for the snow tires being used.

●Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.

286

2-5. Driving information

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■Driving with tire chains

●Vehicles with an emergency tire puncture repair kit: When any of the tires

are punctured, you can seal the tire temporarily. However, do not use the

tire chain on a sealed tire. If any of the rear tires are punctured although it

is required to use tire chains, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

●Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely,

and may cause death or serious injury.

• Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains

being used, or 30 km/h (19 mph), whichever is lower.

• Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.

• Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting

operations that cause sudden engine braking.

• Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle con-

trol is maintained.

Always use the utmost care when driving with tire chains - overconfidence

because you are driving with tire chains could easily lead to a serious acci-

dent.

NOTICE

■Using the tire chains

Use only chains that are of the correct size for your tires so as not to damage

the vehicle body or suspension.

■Repairing or replacing snow tires

Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Toyota dealers or legiti-

mate tire retailers.

This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the opera-

tion of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.

■Fitting tire chains

The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly

when tire chains are fitted.

287

2-5. Driving information

When driving

86_EE (OM18089E)

Trailer towing

Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Toyota also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or

the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc.

Your Toyota is not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow

hitch mounted carriers.

288

2-5. Driving information

86_EE (OM18089E)

Interior features

289

86_EE (OM18089E)

3-1. Using the air

conditioning system

and defogger

Manual air

conditioning system........ 290

Automatic air

conditioning system........ 298

Rear window and outside

rear view mirror

defoggers ....................... 306

3-2. Using the audio system

Using the AUX/

USB port ......................... 308

Steering wheel audio

switches.......................... 309

3-3. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list................ 310

• Interior light......................311

3-4. Using the storage

features

List of storage features ..... 312

• Glove box ........................313

• Bottle holders...................314

• Cup holders/

console tray .....................315

3-5. Other interior features

Sun visors......................... 317

Vanity mirrors.................... 318

Clock................................. 319

Ashtray.............................. 320

Power outlets.................... 321

Seat heaters ..................... 323

Floor mat........................... 325

Trunk features................... 328

290

86_EE (OM18089E)

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Manual air conditioning system



Adjusting the settings

To adjust the fan speed, turn the fan speed control dial clock-

wise (increase) or counterclockwise (decrease).

Turning the dial to “0” turns off the fan.

Vehicles without the button: Turn the temperature con-

trol dial clockwise to increase the temperature.



: If equipped

Fan speed control dial

Air outlet selection dial

Air conditioning on/off button

(if equipped)

Temperature control dial

Outside air or recirculated air mode

STEP

291

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

86_EE (OM18089E)

Vehicles with the button: To adjust the temperature

setting, turn the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or

counterclockwise (cool).

is not pressed, the system will blow ambient temperature air

or heated air.

To select the air outlets, set the air outlet selection dial to the

desired position.

The positions between the air outlet selections shown below can

also be selected for more delicate adjustment.

STEP

292

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

86_EE (OM18089E)

Defogging the windshield

Set the air outlet selection dial to

position.

If the recirculated air mode is

used, it will automatically switch

to the outside air mode.

Perform the following operations accordingly:

●To adjust the fan speed, turn the fan speed control dial.

●To adjust the temperature setting, turn the temperature con-

trol dial.

●Vehicles with the button: If the dehumidification func-

tion is not operating, press to operate the dehumidifi-

cation function.

To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the

air flow and temperature up.

STEP

293

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Air outlets and air flow

Air flows to the upper body.

Air flows to the upper body and

feet.

Air flows to the feet.

Air flows to the feet and the

windshield defogger operates.

294

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

86_EE (OM18089E)

Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Press .

The mode switches between outside air mode (introduces air from outside

the vehicle) (indicator off) and recirculated air mode (recycles air inside

the vehicle) (indicator on) each time the button is pressed.

Adjusting the position of the air outlets

Center outlets

Direct air flow to the left or right,

up or down.

Right and left side outlets

Direct air flow to the left or right,

up or down.

When defrosting the side win-

dows, face the right and left side

outlets toward them.

295

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

86_EE (OM18089E)

Opening and closing the air outlets

Center outlets

Open the air outlet.

Close the air outlet.

Right and left side outlets

Open the vent.

Close the vent.

296

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Fogging up of the windows

●Vehicles with the button: The windows will easily fog up when the

humidity in the vehicle is high. Turning

on will dehumidify the air

from the outlets and defog the windshield effectively.

●Vehicles with the button: If you turn

off, the windows may

fog up more easily.

●The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.

■Outside/recirculated air mode

●When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the

outside/recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is

recommended to prevent outside air from entering the vehicle interior.

●Vehicles with the button: During cooling operation, setting the

recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior effectively.

■When the outside temperature falls to nearly 0°C (32°F) (vehicles with

the button)

The dehumidification function may not operate even when is

pressed.

297

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Ventilation and air conditioning odors

●To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode.

●During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter

into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause

odor to be emitted from the vents.

●To reduce potential odors from occurring:

It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air

mode prior to turning the vehicle off.

■Air conditioning filter

P. 381

WARNING

■To prevent the windshield from fogging up

Do not set the air outlet selection dial to during cool air operation in

extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the

outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the

windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.

NOTICE

■To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the

engine is stopped.

298

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

86_EE (OM18089E)

Automatic air conditioning system



Air outlets are automatically selected and fan speed is automatically

adjusted according to the set temperature setting.

The illustration below is for left-hand drive vehicles.

The button positions may differ slightly for right-hand drive vehi-

cles.

: Left-hand drive vehicles

For the driver’s side

Right-hand drive vehicles

For the front passenger’s side

: Left-hand drive vehicles

For the front passenger’s side

Right-hand drive vehicles

For the driver's side

Windshield defogger

Temperature control dial*1

Outside air or recirculated air mode

Temperature setting

display*1

Off

Automatic

mode Dual operation button

Changes the air outlets used

Air conditioning on/off button

Temperature control dial*2

Temperature setting

display*2

Fan speed control dial

Fan speed/Air

outlet display



: If equipped

299

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

86_EE (OM18089E)

Using the automatic air conditioning system

Press .

The dehumidification function begins to operate. Air outlets

and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the

temperature setting.

Turn temperature control dial clockwise to increase the tem-

perature and turn temperature control dial counterclockwise to

decrease the temperature on the driver’s side.

When is pressed (the indicator on is on) or the pas-

senger’s side temperature control dial is turned, the temperature for

the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately.

■Automatic mode indicator

If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the auto-

matic mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for func-

tions other than that operated is maintained.

Adjusting the settings manually

To adjust the fan speed, turn the fan speed control dial clock-

wise (increase) or counter-clock wise (decrease).

Press to turn the fan off.

STEP

300

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

86_EE (OM18089E)

To adjust the temperature settings, turn the temperature con-

trol dial clockwise (warm) or counter-clock wise (cool).

To adjust the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or

counterclockwise (cool) on the passenger side to separately adjust

the temperature for the passenger and driver sides (dual mode).

Press (the indicator on turns off) to return the driver

and passenger side temperatures to the same setting (simultaneous

mode).

The air conditioning system switches between dual and simultane-

ous modes each time is pressed.

To change the air outlets, press .

The air outlets used are switched each time either side of the button

is pressed.

Defogging the windshield

Press .

The dehumidification function

operates and fan speed

increases.

Set the outside/recirculated air

mode button to outside air mode

if the recirculated air mode is

used. (It may switch automati-

cally.)

To defog the windshield and the

side windows early, turn the air

flow and temperature up.

To return to the previous mode,

press

again when the

windshield is defogged.

STEP

301

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

86_EE (OM18089E)

Air outlets and air flow

Air flows to the upper body.

Air flows to the upper body and

feet.

Air flows to the feet.

Air flows to the feet and the

windshield defogger operates.

If the recirculated air mode is

used, it may automatically switch

to the outside air mode.

302

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

86_EE (OM18089E)

Switching between outside air mode and recirculated air mode

Press .

The mode switches between outside air mode (indicator off) and recircu-

lated air mode (indicator on) each time is pressed.

Adjusting the position of the air outlets

Center outlets

Direct air flow to the left or right,

up or down.

Right and left side outlets

Direct air flow to the left or right,

up or down.

When defrosting the side win-

dows, face the right and left side

outlets toward them.

303

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

86_EE (OM18089E)

Opening and closing the air outlets

Center outlets

Open the air outlet.

Close the air outlet.

Right and left side outlets

Open the vent.

Close the vent.

304

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Using automatic mode

Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting

and the ambient conditions.

Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow

immediately after is pressed.

■Fogging up of the windows

●The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high.

Turning on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the

windshield effectively.

●If you turn

off, the windows may fog up more easily.

●The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.

■Outside/recirculated air mode

●When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the

outside/recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is

effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior.

During cooling operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool

the vehicle interior effectively.

●Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on

the temperature setting or the inside temperature.

■When the outside temperature falls to nearly 0C (32F)

The dehumidification function may not operate even when

pressed.

305

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Ventilation and air conditioning odors

●To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode.

●During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter

into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause

odor to be emitted from the vents.

●To reduce potential odors from occurring:

• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air

mode prior to turning the vehicle off.

• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time

immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic

mode.

■Air conditioning filter

P. 381

WARNING

■To prevent the windshield from fogging up

Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The

difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the wind-

shield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your

vision.

NOTICE

■To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the

engine is stopped.

306

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

86_EE (OM18089E)

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers

The rear window defogger is used to defog the rear window. The out-

side rear view mirror defoggers are used to remove frost, dew or

raindrops from the outside rear view mirrors.

Vehicles with a manual air conditioning system

On/off

The defoggers will automati-

cally turn off after approxi-

mately 15 minutes.

Vehicles with an automatic air conditioning system

The illustration below is for left-hand drive vehicles.

The button positions may differ slightly for right-hand drive vehi-

cles.

On/off

The defoggers will automati-

cally turn off after approxi-

mately 15 minutes.

307

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

86_EE (OM18089E)

■The defoggers can be operated when

Vehicles without a smart entry & start system

The engine switch is in the “ON” position.

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■The outside rear view mirror defoggers

Turning the rear window defogger on will turn the outside rear view mirror

defoggers on.

■When continuous operation is set (vehicles with an automatic air con-

ditioning system)

During continuous operation, the defogger stops operating for 2 minutes

after every 15 minutes of continual operation. Even during the 2 minutes that

operation stops, the operating light remains illuminated. The rear window

defogger will continue to operate in this cycle until it is turned off.

■Customization that can be configured at any authorized Toyota dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional (vehi-

cles with an automatic air conditioning system)

The rear window defogger can be set to 15-minute operation or continuous

operation. (Customizable features P. 5 11 )

WARNING

■When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on

Do not touch the outside surface of the rear view mirrors, as they can

become very hot and burn you.

NOTICE

■To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the rear window defogger on longer than necessary when the

engine is stopped.

308

86_EE (OM18089E)

3-2. Using the audio system

Using the AUX/USB port

■Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system

The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other

adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.

■When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet

Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable

audio device.

This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen

to it through the vehicle’s speakers.

Depending on the type of portable audio device, some device opera-

tion may not be available.

Open the cover and connect

the portable audio device.

309

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

86_EE (OM18089E)

Steering wheel audio switches



WARNING

■To reduce the risk of an accident

Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.

Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the

steering wheel.

Operation may differ depending on the type of audio system or navi-

gation system. For details, refer to the manual provided with the

audio system or navigation system.



: If equipped

310

86_EE (OM18089E)

3-3. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list

Interior light (P. 311)

Engine switch light (vehicles without a smart entry & start sys-

tem)

“ENGINE START STOP” switch light (vehicles with a smart entry

& start system)

Door courtesy lights (if equipped)

311

3-3. Using the interior lights

Interior features

86_EE (OM18089E)

Interior light

Turns the light off

Turns the door position on

Turns the light on

■Illuminated entry system

Vehicles without a smart entry & start system

The lights automatically turn on/off according to the engine switch position,

whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are open/

closed.

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system

The lights automatically turn on/off according to “ENGINE START STOP”

switch mode, the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are

locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are open/closed.

■To prevent battery discharge

If the following lights remain on when the door is not fully closed, the lights

will go off automatically after 20 minutes:

●Interior light (when the switch is in the

“DOOR”

position)

●Engine switch light (vehicles without a smart entry & start system)

●“ENGINE START STOP” switch light (vehicles with a smart entry & start

system)

●Door courtesy lights (if equipped)

■Customization that can be configured at any authorized Toyota dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional

Settings (e.g. the time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.

(Customizable features



P. 511 )

Interior light

312

86_EE (OM18089E)

3-4. Using the storage features

List of storage features

WARNING

■Items that should not be left in the storage spaces

Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this

may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:

●Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact

with other stored items.

●Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other

stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas,

causing a fire hazard.

Glove box

Bottle holders

Cup holders/console tray

313

3-4. Using the storage features

Interior features

86_EE (OM18089E)

Glove box

Pull up the lever to open the

glove box.

WARNING

■Caution while driving

Keep the glove box closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerv-

ing, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open

glove box or the items stored inside.

Glove box

314

3-4. Using the storage features

86_EE (OM18089E)

Bottle holders

■When using the bottle holder

●When storing a bottle, close the cap.

●The bottle may not be stored depending on its size or shape.

WARNING

■Items unsuitable for the bottle holder

Do not place anything other than a pet bottle in the bottle holders.

Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or

sudden braking and cause injury.

NOTICE

■Items unsuitable for the bottle holder

Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bot-

tle holders, or glasses and paper cups containing liquid. The contents may

spill and glasses may break.

Bottle holders

315

3-4. Using the storage features

Interior features

86_EE (OM18089E)

Cup holders/console tray

■Changing the cup holder position

■Changing the console tray size

Remove the cup holder and change the

holder position.

Remove the cup holder.

Cup holders/console tray

316

3-4. Using the storage features

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■Caution while driving

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

●Before driving, place the cup holder in the rear position so that it does not

hinder shift lever operation.

■Items unsuitable for the cup holder

Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.

Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or

sudden braking, causing injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.

●When placing the cup holder, make

sure it is facing the correct direction.

Failure to do so will cause the cup

holder to not be secure in the console

tray and hinder shift lever operation.

Cup holders/console tray

317

Interior features

86_EE (OM18089E)

3-5. Other interior features

Sun visors

To set the visor in the for-

ward position, flip it down.

To set the visor in the side

position, flip down, unhook,

and swing it to the side.

318

3-5. Other interior features

86_EE (OM18089E)

Vanity mirrors

NOTICE

■To prevent battery discharge (vehicles with vanity lights)

Do not leave the vanity lights on for extended periods while the engine is off.

Open the cover to use.

Vehicles with vanity lights: The

light turns on when the cover is

opened.

319

3-5. Other interior features

Interior features

86_EE (OM18089E)

Clock

■The clock is displayed when

Vehicles without a smart entry & start system

The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON

mode.

■When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals

The clock data will be reset.

The clock can be adjusted by pressing the buttons.

Adjusts the hours

Adjusts the minutes

Rounds to the nearest

hour

*: e.g.1:00 to 1:29  1:00

1:30 to 1:59  2:00

320

3-5. Other interior features

86_EE (OM18089E)

Ashtray



WARNING

■When not in use

Keep the ashtray closed. In the event of sudden braking, an accident may

occur due to an occupant being struck by the open ashtray or ash flying out.

■To prevent fire

●Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray,

then make sure the ashtray is fully closed.

●Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.

The ashtray can be installed in

the cup holder. (P. 315)



: If equipped

321

3-5. Other interior features

Interior features

86_EE (OM18089E)

Power outlets

The power outlet can be used for 12 V accessories that run on 10 A

or less.

In the console tray

In the glove box

322

3-5. Other interior features

86_EE (OM18089E)

■The power outlet can be used when

Vehicles without a smart entry & start system

The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON

mode.

NOTICE

■To avoid damaging the power outlet

Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.

Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short cir-

cuit.

■To prevent the fuse from being blown

Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.

■To prevent battery discharge

Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not

running.

323

3-5. Other interior features

Interior features

86_EE (OM18089E)

Seat heaters



■The seat heaters can be used when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■When not in use

Turn the seat heater off. The indicator light goes off.

WARNING

■Burns

●Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat

heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:

• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically chal-

lenged

• Persons with sensitive skin

• Persons who are fatigued

• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping

drugs, cold remedies, etc.)

●Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.

Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature

of the seat and may lead to overheating.

●Do not use the seat heater more than necessary. Doing so may cause

minor burns or overheating.



: If equipped

Press the switch to warm the

seats.

The indicator light comes on

when a seat heater is turned

on.

Rapid heating

Normal heating

324

3-5. Other interior features

86_EE (OM18089E)

NOTICE

■To prevent seat heater damage

Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do

not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.

■To prevent battery discharge

Turn the seat heaters off when the engine is not running.

325

3-5. Other interior features

Interior features

86_EE (OM18089E)

Floor mat

Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same

model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place

onto the carpet.

Front

Driver’s seat floor mat

Front passenger’s seat floor

mat

Retaining hook (clip) eye-

lets

Rear

Rear seat floor mats

■Installing the floor mats (front)

Insert the retaining hooks

(clips) into the floor mat eye-

lets.

Turn the upper knob of each

retaining hook (clip) to secure

the floor mats in place.

: Always align the  marks.

The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the

illustration.

STEP

326

3-5. Other interior features

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause the driver's floor mat to slip, possibly interfering

with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may

become difficult to stop the vehicle. This could lead to an accident, resulting in

death or serious injury.

■When installing a floor mat

●Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year

vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.

●Driver’s seat floor mat: Only use floor mats designed for the driver's seat.

●Front: Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips)

provided.

●Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.

●Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.

■Before driving

●Front: Check that the floor mat is

securely fixed in the correct place with

all the provided retaining hooks (clips).

Be especially careful to perform this

check after cleaning the floor.

●Driver’s seat: With the engine stopped

and the shift lever in P (automatic trans-

mission) or N (manual transmission),

fully depress each pedal to the floor to

make sure it does not interfere with the

floor mat.

327

3-5. Other interior features

Interior features

86_EE (OM18089E)

NOTICE

■When installing the rear floor mats

Make sure that the rear floor mats are

installed in the correct position. If a floor

mat is positioned incorrectly, it may inter-

fere with the seat rail or other parts when

a front seat is moved forward or back-

ward, damaging the vehicle or floor mat.

328

3-5. Other interior features

86_EE (OM18089E)

Trunk features (vehicles with an emergency tire puncture repair kit)

■Auxiliary box

Lift up the luggage mat.

329

3-5. Other interior features

Interior features

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Warning reflector storage box

Depending on the size and shape of the warning reflector case, it may not

be able to be stored.

WARNING

■When storing a warning reflector

Make sure that the warning reflector is stored securely.

Failure to do so may cause it jump out of position in the event of sudden

braking, etc., causing an accident.

■Warning reflector storage box

The warning reflector can be

stored.

330

3-5. Other interior features

86_EE (OM18089E)

Maintenance and care

331

86_EE (OM18089E)

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting

the vehicle exterior ......... 332

Cleaning and protecting

the vehicle interior .......... 336

Cleaning and protecting

the Alcantara

area ........ 340

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance

requirements................... 342

4-3. Do-it-yourself

maintenance

Do-it-yourself service

precautions ..................... 345

Hood ................................. 348

Positioning a floor jack...... 350

Engine compartment......... 352

Tires.................................. 365

Tire inflation pressure ....... 376

Wheels.............................. 378

Air conditioning filter ......... 381

Wireless remote control/

electronic key battery...... 384

Checking and

replacing fuses ............... 388

Light bulbs ........................ 396

332

86_EE (OM18089E)

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior

■Automatic car washes

●Fold the mirrors before washing the vehicle. Start washing from the front

of the vehicle. Make sure to extend the mirrors before driving.

●Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface

and harm your vehicle’s paint.

●Vehicles with a rear spoiler: In certain automatic car washes, the rear

spoiler may interfere with machine operation. This may prevent the vehi-

cle from being cleaned properly or result in damage to the rear spoiler.

■High pressure car washes

●Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity

of the windows.

●Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle

is closed properly.

Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime

condition.

●Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle

body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any

dirt and dust.

●Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a

chamois.

●For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thor-

oughly with water.

●Wipe away any water.

●Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.

If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle

body is cool.

333

4-1. Maintenance and care

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Aluminum wheels

●Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent.

●Wash detergent off with water immediately after use.

●To protect the paint from damage, make sure to observe the following

precautions.

• Do not use acidic, alkaline or abrasive detergent

• Do not use hard brushes

• Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, such as after

driving or parking in hot weather

■Brake (vehicles with brembo brake)

●Painted brake calipers

• When using detergent, use neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes

or abrasive cleaners, as they will damage the paint.

• Do not use detergent on the brake calipers when they are hot.

• Wash detergent off immediately after use.

●Rust may form if the vehicle is parked with wet brake pads or disc rotors,

causing them to stick. Before parking the vehicle after it is washed, drive

slowly and apply the brakes several times to dry the parts.

■Parts containing resin such as the bumper

Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.

WARNING

■When washing the vehicle

Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may

cause the electrical components etc. to catch fire.

■Precautions regarding the exhaust pipes

Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipes and rear bumper diffusers to

become quite hot.

When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipes and diffusers

until they have cooled sufficiently, as touching hot exhaust pipes and rear

bumper diffusers can cause burns.

334

4-1. Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

NOTICE

■To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and compo-

nents (aluminum wheels etc.)

●Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:

• After driving near the sea coast

• After driving on salted roads

• If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface

• If you see dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings on the paint

• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust,

iron powder or chemical substances

• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud

• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface

●If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.

●To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place

with low humidity when storing the wheels.

■Protective film for side sill plates (if equipped)

Make sure to remove the protective film. Failure to do so may cause rust,

depending on conditions.

■Cleaning the exterior lights

●Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.

This may damage the surfaces of the lights.

●Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.

Wax may cause damage to the lenses.

■To prevent damage to the windshield wiper arms

When lifting the wiper arms away from the windshield, pull the driver side

wiper arm upward first, and repeat for the passenger side. When returning

the wipers to their original position, do so from the passenger side first.

335

4-1. Maintenance and care

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

NOTICE

■When using a high pressure car wash

Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or resin manufactured

cover), connectors or the following parts. The parts may be damaged if they

come into contact with high-pressure water.

• Traction related parts

• Steering parts

• Suspension parts

• Brake parts

336

4-1. Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior

The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and

keep it in top condition:

■Protecting the vehicle interior

●Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty sur-

faces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.

●If dirt cannot be removed, wipe it off with a soft cloth damp-

ened with neural detergent diluted to approximately 1%.

Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly

wipe off remaining traces of detergent and water.

■Cleaning the leather areas

●Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.

●Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with

diluted detergent.

Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool

detergent.

●Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly

wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.

●Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remain-

ing moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded ventilated

area.

■Cleaning the synthetic leather areas

●Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.

●Wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral detergent

diluted to approximately 1%.

●Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly

wipe off remaining traces of detergent and water.

337

4-1. Maintenance and care

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Caring for leather areas

Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year

to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.

■Shampooing the carpets

There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a

sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply

water. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possi-

ble.

■Seat belts

Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also

check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.

WARNING

■Water in the vehicle

●Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.

Doing so may cause electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch

fire.

●Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.

(P. 136)

Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function

properly, resulting in death or severe injury.

■Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)

Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off

the windshield, obstructing the driver's view and leading to an accident,

resulting in death or serious injury.

338

4-1. Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

NOTICE

■Cleaning detergents

●Do not use organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, acidic or

alkaline solutions, dye, bleach or other detergent. Doing so may discolor

the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces.

●Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel's or other

interior part’s painted surface may be damaged.

●Do not use a chemical agent containing silicone (highly-polymerized sili-

con compound) when cleaning any of the electrical appliances such as the

air conditioning, all switches and their surrounding areas.

If silicon (highly-polymerized silicon compound) contacts these compo-

nents, it may cause the electrical appliances to malfunction.

■Preventing damage to leather surfaces

Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of

leather surfaces.

●Remove any dust, dirt, sand, oil spots etc. on leather surfaces immedi-

ately.

●Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.

Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.

●Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax on the uphol-

stery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats

up significantly.

■Water on the floor

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.

Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes

into contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and

may also cause the body to rust.

339

4-1. Maintenance and care

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

NOTICE

■Cleaning the inside of the rear window

●Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires.

●Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause

damage to the rear window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened

with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in

strokes running parallel to the heater wires.

■When cleaning the instrument panel

When small grains of sand and so forth have gotten into instrument panel’s

surface and cannot be wiped away using a cloth, use a clay bar without add-

ing water. Forcibly trying to wipe the surface clean with a brush or sponge

may scratch the surface or fragments of the cloth may be left in the surface.

340

4-1. Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

Cleaning and protecting the Alcantara

area



: If equipped

The following procedures will protect and keep your vehicle’s

Alcantara

upholstery in top condition:

■Day-to-day cleaning

Perform the following procedures regularly (approximately once

a month).

Wipe the entire Alcantara

area with a soft cloth that has

been dampened with lukewarm water (approximately 40C

[104F]) and squeezed out.

Do not wipe too hard. Doing so may make the Alcantara

uphol-

stery surface become uneven. Also, only use a clean cloth.

Once dry, brush the area with a soft brush.

■Liquid stains

●If liquid is spilled, lightly pat the area with a tissue paper or

similar to soak up the liquid.

●When mud, coffee, etc., has dried on the Alcantara

uphol-

stery, remove it by lightly brushing the area with a soft brush

or similar.

We recommend using a vacuum cleaner to clean up the area after

the above has been performed.

When a stain cannot be removed using the above procedures,

remove it by performing the following:

Lightly wipe the stained area from the outside to the inside

from multiple angles with a soft cloth that has been damp-

ened with lukewarm water (approximately 40C [104F])

and squeezed out.

Do not wipe the area so strongly that it causes the Alcantara

upholstery surface to become uneven. Also, prepare a clean

cloth, and always use a clean area of the cloth.

STEP

341

4-1. Maintenance and care

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

■When removing dirt or dust from the Alcantara

areas

Remove dirt or dust from the Alcantara

areas by lighting brushing with a

soft brush. If this does not remove the dirt or dust, remove it using adhesive

tape.

NOTICE

■When soaking up spilled liquids

Do not press down too firmly with the cloth, tissue paper etc., as doing so

may cause the liquid to further penetrate the material, making soaking up

the liquid more difficult.

If the Alcantara

upholstery surface becomes uneven,

lightly brush it with a soft brush.

Allow the surface to dry completely.

■Oil stains

You will need the following items:

●A cloth that has been dampened with benzene

●A dry cloth

Using a dry cloth or tissue paper, wipe away as much of the

oil as possible to prevent the stained area from expanding.

After patting the area from the outside to the inside from

multiple angles using the cloth dampened with benzene,

soak up the oil and benzene that floats up by patting the

area with a dry cloth.

If the Alcantara

upholstery surface becomes uneven,

lightly brush it with a soft brush.

STEP

342

86_EE (OM18089E)

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements

To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular

maintenance is essential. Toyota recommends the following mainte-

nance.

■Scheduled maintenance

Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified inter-

vals according to the maintenance schedule.

For full details of your maintenance schedule, read the “Toyota

Service Booklet” or “Toyota Warranty Booklet”.

■Do-it-yourself maintenance

What about do-it-yourself maintenance?

Many maintenance items are easy to do yourself if you have a little

mechanical ability and a few basic automotive tools.

Note, however, that some maintenance tasks require special tools

and skills. These are best performed by qualified technicians. Even if

you're an experienced do-it-yourself mechanic, we recommend that

repairs and maintenance be conducted by any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional. Any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer will keep a record of

maintenance, which could be useful should you ever require Warranty

Service. Should you choose to select a qualified and equipped profes-

sional other than an authorized Toyota repairer to service or maintain

your vehicle, we recommend that you request that a record of mainte-

nance be kept.

343

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Where to go for maintenance service?

In order to maintain your vehicle in the highest possible condition, Toyota

recommends that all repairs and service operations be carried out by autho-

rized Toyota dealers or repairers or other duly qualified and equipped profes-

sionals. For repairs and services covered by your warranty, please visit an

authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, who will use genuine Toyota parts in

repairing any difficulties you may encounter. There can also be advantages

in utilizing authorized Toyota dealers or repairers for non-warranty repairs

and services, as members of the Toyota network will be able to expertly

assist you with any difficulties you may encounter.

Your Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-

fessional service department will perform all of the scheduled maintenance

on your vehicle - reliably and economically due to their experience with

Toyota vehicles.

■Does your vehicle need repairs?

Be on the alert for changes in performance and sounds, and visual tip-offs

that indicate service is needed. Some important clues are:

●Engine missing, stumbling or pinging

●Appreciable loss of power

●Strange engine noises

●A fluid leak under the vehicle (However, water dripping from the air condi-

tioning system after use is normal.)

●Change in exhaust sound (This may indicate a dangerous carbon mon-

oxide leak. Drive with the windows open and have the exhaust system

checked immediately.)

●Flat-looking tires, excessive tire squeal when cornering, uneven tire wear

●Vehicle pulls to one side when driven straight on a level road

●Strange noises related to suspension movement

●Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling brake pedal or clutch pedal,

pedal almost touches the floor, vehicle pulls to one side when braking

●Engine coolant temperature continually higher than normal

If you notice any of these clues, take your vehicle to any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional as

soon as possible. Your vehicle may need adjustment or repair.

344

4-2. Maintenance

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■If your vehicle is not properly maintained

It could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible serious injury or

death.

■Warning in handling of the battery

Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead com-

pounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after

handling. (P. 359)

345

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions

If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct

procedures as given in these sections.

Items Parts and tools

Battery condition (P. 359)

• Warm water

• Baking soda

• Grease

• Conventional wrench

(for terminal clamp bolts)

• Distilled water

Engine coolant level (P. 356)

• “TOYOTA Genuine 50/50 Pre-

mixed Super Long Life Coolant

BLUE” or similar high-quality

ethylene glycol-based non-

silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite

and non-borate coolant with long-

life hybrid organic acid

technology. “TOYOTA Genuine

50/50 Pre-mixed Super Long Life

Coolant BLUE” is pre-mixed with

50% coolant and 50% deionized

water.

• Funnel (used only for adding cool-

ant)

Engine oil level P. 353)

• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or

equivalent

• Rag or paper towel, funnel

(used only for adding engine oil)

Fuses (P. 388) • Fuse with same amperage rating

as original

Light bulbs (P. 396)

• Bulb with same number and watt-

age rating as original

• Phillips-head screwdriver

• Flathead screwdriver

346

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may

move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death

or serious injury, observe the following precautions.

■When working on the engine compartment

●Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine

drive belt.

●Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right

after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.

●Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the

engine compartment.

●Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the bat-

tery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.

●Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous

and corrosive sulfuric acid.

●Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage

painted surfaces.

If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with

clean water immediately.

If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.

Items Parts and tools

Radiator and condenser

(P. 358) 

Tire inflation pressure (P. 376) • Tire pressure gauge

• Compressed air source

Washer fluid (P. 363)

• Water washer fluid containing

antifreeze (for winter use)

• Funnel

347

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille

Vehicles without a smart entry & start system: Be sure the engine switch is

off. With the engine switch in the “ON” position, the electric cooling fans may

automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant tem-

perature is high. (P. 358)

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system: Be sure the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch is off. With the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in IGNITION

ON mode, the electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air

conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. (P. 358)

■Safety glasses

Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from

getting in the eyes.

NOTICE

■If you remove the air cleaner filter

Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear

due to dirt in the air.

■If the fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads

wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.

348

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

86_EE (OM18089E)

Hood

Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.

Pull the hood release lever.

The hood will pop up slightly.

Push the auxiliary catch lever

to the left and lift the hood.

Hold the hood open by insert-

ing the supporting rod into the

slot.

STEP

349

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■Pre-driving check

Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.

If the hood is not locked properly it may open while the vehicle is in motion

and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■When opening the hood

●Do not lift up or operate the wipers. Doing so may cause the hood and wip-

ers to contact, scratching the hood.

●Use caution when opening the hood in windy weather as it may close sud-

denly in strong wind.

●Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota products to the

hood. Such additional weight on the hood may cause it to be too heavy to

be supported by the supporting rod when opened.

■When closing the hood

Do not apply excessive weight or force when closing the hood as doing so

may result in damage.

350

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

86_EE (OM18089E)

Positioning a floor jack

When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack cor-

rectly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.

■Front

■Rear

351

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■When raising your vehicle

Make sure to observe the following precautions to reduce the possibility of

death or serious injury:

●When using a floor jack, follow the instructions of the manual provided with

the jack.

●Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.

●Do not put any part of your body underneath the vehicle when it is sup-

ported only by the floor jack.

●Always use floor jack and/or automotive jack stands on a solid, flat, level

surface.

●Do not start the engine while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack.

●Stop the vehicle on level, firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and shift

the shift lever to P (vehicles with an automatic transmission) or R (vehicles

with a manual transmission).

●Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point.

Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage

the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.

●Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.

●When raising the vehicle, do not place any object on top of or underneath

the floor jack.

●When raising the vehicle, ensure that there is sufficient surrounding space.

The vehicle’s position may change slightly when lowered.

●Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack

such as the one shown in the illustra-

tion.

352

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

86_EE (OM18089E)

Engine compartment

*: For right-hand drive vehicles: This is located on the opposite side of the

engine compartment.

Battery* (P. 359)

Engine oil level dipstick

(P. 353)

Engine oil filler cap

(P. 354)

Washer fluid tank (P. 363)

Electric cooling fans

Condenser (if equipped)

(P. 358)

Radiator (P. 358)

Engine coolant reservoir

(P. 356)

Fuse box (P. 388)

353

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

Engine oil

With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil

level on the dipstick.

■Checking the engine oil

Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine

and turning it off, wait more than five minutes for the oil to

drain back into the bottom of the engine.

Hold a rag under the end and

pull the dipstick out.

Wipe the dipstick clean.

Reinsert the dipstick fully.

Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check

the oil level.

When checking the oil, look at both sides of the dipstick and use the

lower measurement to determine the level of oil.

Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.

Low

Full

STEP

354

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Adding engine oil

If the oil level is below or near

the low level mark, add engine

oil of the same type as already in

the engine.

Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before

adding oil.

Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.

Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.

Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.

Engine oil

selection P. 500

Oil quantity

(Low  Full) 1.0 L (1.1 qt., 0.9 Imp. qt.)

Items Clean funnel

STEP

355

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Engine oil consumption

A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the follow-

ing situations, oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be

refilled in between oil maintenance intervals.

●When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle

or after replacing the engine

●If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used

●When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, or when driving

while accelerating or decelerating frequently

●When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently

through heavy traffic

WARNING

■Used engine oil

●Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may

cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should

be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine

oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.

●Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do

not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the

ground.

Call any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional, service station or auto parts store for information

concerning recycling or disposal.

●Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.

356

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

86_EE (OM18089E)

Engine coolant

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW”

lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.

Reservoir cap

“FULL”

“LOW”

If the level is on or below the

“LOW” line, add coolant up to the

“FULL” line.

NOTICE

■To prevent serious engine damage

Check the oil level on a regular basis.

■When replacing the engine oil

●Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.

●Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.

●Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.

●Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.

■If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing

Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant filler cap, radiator cap,

drain cock and water pump.

If you cannot find a leak, have any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional pressure test the cap and

check for leaks in the cooling system.

357

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Coolant selection

Only use “TOYOTA Genuine 50/50 Pre-mixed Super Long Life Coolant

BLUE” or similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine,

non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technol-

ogy.

“TOYOTA Genuine 50/50 Pre-mixed Super Long Life Coolant BLUE” is a

mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Enabled: -35C [-31F])

For more details about engine coolant, contact any authorized Toyota dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

WARNING

■When the engine is hot

Do not remove the radiator cap.

The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the

cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.

NOTICE

■When adding engine coolant

Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of

water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion

protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.

■If you spill coolant

Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.

358

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

86_EE (OM18089E)

Radiator and condenser

Check the radiator and condenser and clear away any foreign

objects.

If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of

their condition, have your vehicle checked by any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional.

WARNING

■When the engine is hot

Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause seri-

ous injuries, such as burns.

359

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

Battery

Check the battery as follows.

■Caution symbols

The meanings of each caution symbol on the top of the battery are as

follows:

■Battery exterior

Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that

there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.

Hold-down clamp

Terminals

No smoking, no naked

flames, no sparks Battery acid

Shield eyes Note operating

instructions

Keep away from chil-

dren Explosive gas

360

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Checking battery fluid

Check that the level is between

“UPPER LEVEL” and “LOWER

LEVEL”.

“UPPER LEVEL”

“LOWER LEVEL”

If the fluid level is at or below

“LOWER LEVEL”, add distilled

water.

■Adding distilled water

Remove the vent plug.

Add distilled water.

If the “UPPER LEVEL” line cannot be seen, check the fluid level by

looking directly at the cell.

Put the vent plug back on and close securely.

Low O.K.

STEP

361

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Before recharging

When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable

and explosive. Therefore, before recharging:

●If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to discon-

nect the ground cable.

●Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and

disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.

■After recharging/reconnecting the battery (vehicles with a smart entry

& start system)

●Unlocking the doors using the smart entry & start system may not be

possible immediately after reconnecting the battery. If this happens, use

the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the

doors.

●Start the engine with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCES-

SORY mode. The engine may not start with the “ENGINE START STOP”

switch turned off. However, the engine will operate normally from the sec-

ond attempt.

●The “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If

the battery is reconnected, the vehicle will return the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch mode to the status it was in before the battery was discon-

nected. Make sure to turn off the engine before disconnect the battery.

Take extra care when connecting the battery if the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch mode prior to discharge is unknown.

If the engine will not start even after multiple attempts, contact any

authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped

professional.

362

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■Chemicals in the battery

A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce

hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death

or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the

battery:

●Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.

●Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.

●Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.

●Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.

●Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.

●Keep children away from the battery.

■Where to safely charge the battery

Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a

garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.

■Emergency measures regarding electrolyte

●If electrolyte gets in your eyes

Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immedi-

ate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or

cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.

●If electrolyte gets on your skin

Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical

attention immediately.

●If electrolyte gets on your clothes

It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the cloth-

ing and follow the procedure above if necessary.

●If you accidentally swallow electrolyte

Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention

immediately.

363

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

Washer fluid

If the washer fluid level is at

“LOW”, add washer fluid.

NOTICE

■When recharging the battery

Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all

accessories are turned off.

■When adding distilled water

Avoid overfilling. Water spilled during battery recharging may cause corro-

sion.

■Using the gauge

The washer fluid level can be checked by

observing the position of the level on the

liquid-covered holes in the gauge.

If the level falls below the second hole

from the bottom (the “LOW” position),

refill the washer fluid.

CTH43AS134

Current

fluid level

364

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■When adding washer fluid

Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as washer fluid

contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.

NOTICE

■Washer fluid

Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.

Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces, as well as

damaging the pump leading to problems of the washer fluid not spraying.

■Diluting washer fluid

Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.

Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bot-

tle.

365

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

Tires

Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules

and treadwear.

■Checking tires

Check if the treadwear indicators are showing on the tires. Also

check the tires for uneven wear, such as excessive wear on one

side of the tread.

Check the spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated.

New tread

Worn tread

Treadwear indicator

The location of treadwear indicators is shown by a “TWI” or “” mark,

etc., molded into the sidewall of each tire.

Replace the tires if the treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.

366

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Tire rotation

Vehicles with a compact spare tire or an emergency tire punc-

ture repair kit

Rotate the tires in the order

shown.

To equalize tire wear and help

extend tire life, Toyota recom-

mends that tire rotation is car-

ried out approximately every

10000 km (6000 miles).

Vehicles with a spare tire of the same wheel type as the

installed tires

Rotate the tires in the order

shown.

To equalize tire wear and help

extend tire life, Toyota recom-

mends that tire rotation is car-

ried out approximately every

10000 km (6000 miles).

■Tire pressure warning system

Your Toyota is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that

uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low

tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. (P. 423)

Front

367

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and

transmitters must also be installed.

When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are

installed, new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes

must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and tire

pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure

warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-

fessional. (P. 369)

368

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

86_EE (OM18089E)

■How to initialize the tire pressure warning system

Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch (vehicles with a smart entry & start system) or

the engine switch (vehicles without a smart entry & start sys-

tem) off.

Initialization cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving.

Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire infla-

tion pressure level. (P. 507)

Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire infla-

tion pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate

based on this pressure level.

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON

mode (vehicles with a smart entry & start system) or engine

switch to the “ON” position (vehicles without a smart entry &

start system).

Press and hold the tire pressure

warning reset switch until the tire

pressure warning light blinks

slowly 3 times.

STEP

369

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system: Wait for a few min-

utes with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in IGNITION ON

mode and then turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.

Vehicles without a smart entry & start system: Wait for a few

minutes with the engine switch in the “ON” position and then

turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

Registering ID codes

The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a

unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and

transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code. Have the ID code

registered by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional.

STEP

370

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

86_EE (OM18089E)

■When to replace your vehicle’s tires

Tires should be replaced if:

●The treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.

●You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to

expose the fabric or bulges indicating internal damage

●A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size

or location of a cut or other damage

If you are not sure, consult with any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional.

■Replacing tires and wheels

If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not regis-

tered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving

for about 10 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking

for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.

■Tire life

Any tires over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if

they have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.

■Routine tire inflation pressure checks

The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pres-

sure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your rou-

tine of daily vehicle checks.

■If the tread on snow tires wears down 4 mm (0.16 in.)

The effectiveness of snow tires is lost.

■Low profile tires (vehicles with 17-inch tires)

Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance

will be reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires.

Be sure to use snow tires or tire chains on snowy and/or icy roads and drive

carefully at a speed appropriate for road and weather conditions.

■If you press the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally

If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified

level and initialize the tire pressure warning system again.

371

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Tire pressure warning system certification

372

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

86_EE (OM18089E)

373

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■Tire pressure warning system operation

The tire pressure warning system may not provide warning immediately if a

tire bursts or if sudden air leakage occurs.

■When inspecting or replacing tires

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.

Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train, as well as

dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting

in death or serious injury.

●Make sure to install 4 tires that are of the specified size, and that all 4 tires

are the same size, same maker, same brand and tread pattern.

●Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.

●Only use radial tires.

●Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.

●Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.

Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.

■When initializing the tire pressure warning system

Do not operate the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting

the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure

warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it

may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.

374

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

86_EE (OM18089E)

NOTICE

■Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves,

transmitters and tire valve caps

●When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning

valves and transmitters, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer,

or another duly qualified and equipped professional as the tire pressure

warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly.

●Make sure to install the tire valve caps. If the tire valve caps are not

installed, water could enter the tire pressure warning valves and the tire

pressure warning valves could be bound.

●When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those

specified. The cap may become stuck.

■To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve

and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact

any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional or other qualified service shop as soon as possible.

After use of liquid sealant, make sure to replace the tire pressure warning

valve and transmitter when repairing or replacing the tire. (P. 367)

■Driving on rough roads

Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or pot holes.

These conditions may cause losses in tire air pressure, reducing the cush-

ioning ability of the tires. In addition driving on rough roads may cause dam-

age to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.

375

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

NOTICE

■Low profile tires and wheels (vehicles with 17-inch tires)

Low profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the tire wheel

when receiving impact from the road surface. Therefore pay attention to the

following:

●Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated, they

may be damaged more severely.

●Avoid pot holes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards. Failure

to do so can lead to severe tire and wheel damage.

■If tire pressures become low while driving

Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.

376

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

86_EE (OM18089E)

Tire inflation pressure

■Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure

Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:

●Reduced fuel economy

●Reduced driving comfort and poor handling

●Reduced tire life due to wear

●Reduced safety

●Damage to the drive train

If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

■Instructions for checking tire pressure

When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:

●Check only when the tires are cold.

If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been

driven for more than 1.5 km or 1 mile, you will get an accurate cold tire

inflation pressure reading.

●Always use a tire pressure gauge.

It is difficult to judge if a tire is properly inflated based only on its appear-

ance.

●It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving as heat

is generated in the tire. Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving.

●Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is

balanced.

Make sure to maintain the proper tire inflation pressure. Tire inflation

pressure should be checked at least once per month. However,

Toyota recommends that tire inflation pressure be checked once

every two weeks. (P. 507)

377

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance

Keep your tires properly inflated.

If the tires are not properly inflated, the following conditions may occur which

could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:

●Excessive wear

●Uneven wear

●Poor handling

●Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires

●Air leaking from between tire and wheel

●Wheel deformation and/or tire damage

●Greater possibility of tire damage while driving (due to road hazards,

expansion joints, sharp edges in the road, etc.)

NOTICE

■When inspecting and adjusting tire pressure

Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps.

If a valve cap is not installed, dirt or moisture may get into the valve and

cause an air leak, resulting in decreased tire inflation pressure.

378

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

86_EE (OM18089E)

Wheels

If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced.

Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of

handling control.

■Wheel selection

When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that

they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter,

rim width, and inset

Replacement wheels are available at any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional.

*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.

Toyota does not recommend using:

●Wheels of different sizes or types

●Used wheels

●Bent wheels that have been straightened

■Aluminum wheel precautions

●Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use

with your aluminum wheels.

●When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the

wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1600 km (1000 miles).

●Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using

tire chains.

●Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and a

plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.

379

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

■When replacing wheels

The wheels of your Toyota are equipped with tire pressure warning valves

and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide

advance warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever

wheels are replaced, the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must

be installed. (P. 367)

WARNING

■When replacing wheels

●Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the

Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.

●Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tube-

less tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious

injury.

■When installing the wheel nuts

●Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened,

leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can

cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing an acci-

dent and resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any oil or grease

from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

●Be sure to install the wheel nuts with

the tapered ends facing inward. Install-

ing the nuts with the tapered ends fac-

ing outward can cause the wheel to

break and eventually cause the wheel

to come off while driving, which could

lead to an accident resulting in death or

serious injury.

Tapered portion

380

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

86_EE (OM18089E)

NOTICE

■Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

●Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning

valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by any autho-

rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-

fessional or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to

purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at any autho-

rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-

fessional.

●Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle.

Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with

non-genuine wheels.

381

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

Air conditioning filter

The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air

conditioning efficiency.

■Removal method

Vehicles without a smart entry & start system

Turn the engine switch off.

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.

Open the glove box. Slide off

the damper.

Push in each side of the glove

box and pull the glove box

toward you to disconnect the

claws.

STEP

382

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

86_EE (OM18089E)

Lower the glove box slowly

until surface is horizontal

with the floor, then pull it out.

(Simply pulling with gentle

force will disengage the lower

claws.)

Lower claw

Lower claw engagement

point

Do not forcibly pull the glove

box. Otherwise, the lower

claws or the lower claw

engagement points may be

deformed, making it difficult to

reinstall or close the glove box.

Remove the filter cover.

Remove the air conditioning

filter and replace it with a new

one.

The “UP” marks shown on

the filter should be pointing up.

When installing, reverse the steps listed.

STEP

383

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Checking interval

Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance

schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement

may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to

the “Toyota Service Booklet” or “Toyota Warranty Booklet”.)

■If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically

The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.

NOTICE

■When removing the glove box

Do not forcibly pull the glove box. Otherwise, the lower claws or the lower

claw engagement points may be deformed, making it difficult to reinstall or

close the glove box.

■When using the air conditioning system

Make sure that a filter is always installed.

Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the

system.

384

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

86_EE (OM18089E)

Wireless remote control/electronic key battery

Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.

■You will need the following items:

●Flathead screwdriver

●Lithium battery CR2016 (vehicles without a smart entry & start

system), or CR2032 (vehicles with a smart entry & start sys-

tem)

■Replacing the battery (vehicles without a smart entry & start

system)

Remove the cover.

To prevent damage to the key,

cover the tip of the screwdriver

with a rag.

To prevent the buttons from

being disassembled, face the

button surface downward.

Remove the module.

STEP

385

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

Open the case cover using a

coin protected with tape etc.

and remove the depleted bat-

tery.

Insert a new battery with the

“+” terminal facing up.

■Replacing the battery (vehicles with a smart entry & start

system)

Take out the mechanical key.

Remove the cover.

To prevent damage to the key,

cover the tip of the screwdriver

with a rag.

STEP

386

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Use a CR2016 (vehicles without a smart entry & start system) or

CR2032 (vehicles with a smart entry & start system) lithium battery

●Batteries can be purchased at any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer,

or another duly qualified and equipped professional, local electrical appli-

ance shops or camera stores.

●Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the

manufacturer.

●Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.

■If the key battery is depleted

The following symptoms may occur:

●The smart entry & start system (if equipped) and wireless remote control

will not function properly.

●The operational range will be reduced.

■When putting the module back (vehicles without a smart entry & start

system)

Remove the depleted battery.

Insert a new battery with the

“+” terminal facing up.

STEP

Insert the module from directly above.

Inserting it on an angle may prevent the

key buttons from operating properly.

387

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■Removed battery and other parts

These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking.

Keep away from children. Failure to do so could result in death or serious

injury.

■Certification for the lithium battery

●RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT

TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE

INSTRUCTIONS

●Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or

the like.

NOTICE

■For normal operation after replacing the battery

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:

●Always work with dry hands.

Moisture may cause the battery to rust.

●Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.

●Do not bend either of the battery terminals.

388

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

86_EE (OM18089E)

Checking and replacing fuses

If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have

blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.

Vehicles without a smart entry & start system

Turn the engine switch off.

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.

Open the fuse box cover.

Engine compartment

Push the tabs in and lift the lid

off.

Instrument panel

Remove the lid.

STEP

389

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage rat-

ings” (P. 391) for details about which fuse to check.

Remove the fuse with the pull-

out tool.

Check if the fuse has blown.

Type A

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Replace it with one of an

appropriate amperage rating.

The amperage rating can be

found on the fuse box lid.

Type B

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Replace it with one of an

appropriate amperage rating.

The amperage rating can be

found on the fuse box lid.

STEP

390

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

86_EE (OM18089E)

Type C

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Contact any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped

professional.

Type D

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Contact any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped

professional.

391

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

Fuse layout and amperage ratings

■Engine compartment

Fuse Ampere Circuit

MIR HTR 7.5 A Outside rear view mirror defoggers

RDI 25 A Electric cooling fan

(PUSH-AT) 7.5 A Engine control unit

ABS NO. 1 40 A ABS

HEATER 50 A Air conditioning system

WASHER 10 A Windshield washer

WIPER 30 A Windshield wipers

RR DEF 30 A Rear window defogger

(RR FOG) 10 A Rear fog light

D FR DOOR 25 A Power window (driver’s side)

(CDS) 25 A Electric cooling fan

D-OP 25 A



ABS NO. 2 25 A ABS

D FL DOOR 25 A Power window (passenger’s side)

SPARE See note. Spare fuse

392

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

86_EE (OM18089E)

SPARE See note. Spare fuse

ST 7.5 A Starting system

ALT-S 7.5 A Charging system

(STR LOCK) 7.5 A Steering lock system

D/L 20 A Power door lock

ETCS 15 A Engine control unit

(AT+B) 7.5 A Transmission

(AM2 NO. 2) 7.5 A Smart entry & start system

EFI (CTRL) 15 A Engine control unit

EFI (HTR) 15 A

Multiport fuel injection system/

sequential multiport fuel injection

system

EFI (IGN) 15 A Starting system

EFI (+B) 7.5 A Engine control unit

HAZ 15 A Turn signal lights, emergency

flashers

MPX-B 7.5 A Automatic air conditioning system,

gauge and meters

F/PMP 20 A

Multiport fuel injection system/

sequential multiport fuel injection

system

IG2 MAIN 30 A SRS airbag system, engine control

unit

DCC 30 A Interior light, wireless remote con-

trol, main body ECU

Fuse Ampere Circuit

393

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

Note

One of each of the following spare fuses are provided: 7.5 A, 10 A, 15

A, 20 A, 25 A, 30 A.

HORN NO. 2 7.5 A Horn

HORN NO. 1 7.5 A Horn

H-LP LH LO 15 A Left-hand headlight (low beam)

H-LP RH LO 15 A Right-hand headlight (low beam)

H-LP LH HI 10 A Left-hand headlight (high beam)

H-LP RH HI 10 A Right-hand headlight (high beam)

INJ 30 A

Multiport fuel injection system/

sequential multiport fuel injection

system

H-LP WASHER 30 A Headlight cleaners

AM2 NO. 1 40 A Starting system, engine control unit

EPS 80 A Electric power steering

A/B MAIN 15 A SRS airbag system

ECU-B 7.5 A Wireless remote control, main body

ECU

DOME 20 A Interior light

IG2 7.5 A Engine control unit

Fuse Ampere Circuit

394

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Instrument panel

Fuse Ampere Circuit

ECU ACC 10 A Main body ECU, outside rear view

mirrors

P/POINT No.2 15 A Power outlet

PANEL 10 A Illumination

TAIL 10 A Tail lights

DRL 10 A Daytime running light system

STOP 7.5 A Stop lights

OBD 7.5 A On-board diagnosis system

HEATER-S 7.5 A Air conditioning system

HEATER 10 A Air conditioning system

FR FOG LH 10 A Left-hand front fog light

FR FOG RH 10 A Right-hand front fog light

BK/UP LP 7.5 A Back-up lights

ECU IG1 10 A ABS, electric power steering

AM1 7.5 A Starting system

AMP 15 A Audio system

AT UNIT 15 A Transmission

GAUGE 7.5 A Gauge and meters, smart entry &

start system

ECU IG2 10 A Engine control unit

SEAT HTR LH 10 A Left-hand seat heater

SEAT HTR RH 10 A Right-hand seat heater

RADIO 7.5 A Audio system

P/POINT No.1 15 A Power outlet

395

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

■After a fuse is replaced

●If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb

may need replacement. (P. 396)

●If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by any

authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

■If there is an overload in the circuits

The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.

WARNING

■To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or

injury.

●Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any

other object in place of a fuse.

●Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent.

●Do not modify the fuse or the fuse box.

NOTICE

■Before replacing fuses

Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by any autho-

rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-

fessional.

396

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

86_EE (OM18089E)

Light bulbs

You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level

of replacement varies depending on the bulb. As there is a danger

that components may be damaged, we recommend that replacement

is carried out by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional.

■Preparing a replacement light bulb

Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (P. 508)

■Front bulb locations

Side turn

signal lights

397

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Rear bulb locations

Back-up lights

License

plate

lights

Rear fog

light

398

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

86_EE (OM18089E)

Replacing light bulbs

■Side turn signal lights

Turn the steering wheel in the

opposite direction of the light to

be replaced.

Turn the steering wheel to a point

that allows your hand to easily fit

between the tire and fender liner.

Remove the clip and partly

remove the fender liner.

To prevent damage to the vehicle,

cover the tip of the screwdriver

with a rag.

Release the light’s claw.

Insert the screwdriver into the

hole. While firmly pushing the

screwdriver forward, move it

towards the inside of the vehicle.

To prevent damage to the vehicle,

wrap the tip of the screwdriver

with a tape.

STEP

399

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

Pull out the lamp and turn the

lens counterclockwise.

Remove the light bulb.

When installing, reverse the steps listed.

STEP

400

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Back-up lights

Remove the clips.

To prevent damage to the vehicle,

cover the tip of the screwdriver

with a rag.

Turn the bulb base

counterclockwise.

Remove the light bulb.

When installing, reverse the steps listed.

STEP

401

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Rear fog light

Remove the clips.

To prevent damage to the vehicle,

cover the tip of the screwdriver

with a rag.

Turn the bulb base

counterclockwise.

Remove the light bulb.

When installing, reverse the steps listed.

STEP

402

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

86_EE (OM18089E)

■License plate lights

Vehicles with the trunk panel

cover: Remove the trunk panel

cover clips and partly remove the

trunk panel cover.

To prevent damage to the vehicle,

cover the tip of the screwdriver

with a rag.

Turn the bulb base

counterclockwise.

Remove the light bulb.

When installing, reverse the steps listed.

STEP

403

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Replacing the following bulbs

If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by

any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional.

●Headlights

●Front position lights/daytime running lights

●Front turn signal lights

●Front fog lights

●Stop/tail lights

●Stop lights

●Rear turn signal lights

●High mounted stoplight

●Door courtesy lights (if equipped)

404

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens

Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the light lens does not

indicate a malfunction. Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional for more information in the

following situations:

●Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.

●Water has built up inside the light.

■LED light bulbs

The headlights, front position lights/daytime running lights, front turn signal

lights, front fog lights, stop/tail lights, stop lights, rear turn signal lights and

high mounted stoplight consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn

out, take your vehicle to any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional to have the light replaced.

■When replacing light bulbs

Toyota recommends that you use genuine Toyota products designed for this

vehicle.

Because certain bulbs are connected to circuits designed to prevent over-

load, non-genuine parts or parts not designed for this vehicle may be unus-

able.

■Removing and installing the luggage trim cover and trunk panel cover

clip

Removing

Installing

405

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■Replacing light bulbs

●Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after

turning off the lights.

The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.

●Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. When it is

unavoidable to hold the glass portion, use and hold with a clean dry cloth

to avoid getting moisture and oils on the bulb.

Also, if the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.

●Fully install the light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to

do so may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering a light unit. This

may damage the light or cause condensation to build up on the inner side

of the lens.

■When changing the rear fog light or back-up lights

Stop the engine and wait until the exhaust pipes have cooled down suffi-

ciently. The lights are located near the exhaust pipe and touching a hot

exhaust pipe can cause burns.

■To prevent damage or fire

Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.

406

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

86_EE (OM18089E)

When trouble arises

407

86_EE (OM18089E)

5-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers.......... 408

If your vehicle needs

to be towed..................... 409

If you think something

is wrong .......................... 417

Fuel pump shut

off system ....................... 418

5-2. Steps to take in

an emergency

If a warning light turns

on or a warning

buzzer sounds... ............ 419

If a warning message is

displayed ........................ 428

If you have a flat tire

(vehicles with an

emergency tire puncture

repair kit)......................... 446

If you have a flat tire

(vehicles with a

spare tire) ....................... 462

If the engine will

not start........................... 474

If the shift lever cannot

be shifted from P ............ 477

If you lose your keys......... 478

If the electronic key does

not operate properly ....... 479

If the battery is

discharged ...................... 483

If your vehicle

overheats........................ 488

If the vehicle becomes

stuck ............................... 491

If your vehicle has to

be stopped in an

emergency...................... 493

408

86_EE (OM18089E)

5-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers

■Emergency flashers

If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the engine is not

operating, the battery may discharge.

The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the

vehicle has to be stopped in the road due to a breakdown, etc.

Press the switch.

All the turn signal lights will

flash. To turn them off, press

the switch once again.

409

5-1. Essential information

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

If your vehicle needs to be towed

Before towing

The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact

any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional before towing.

●The engine is running, but the vehicle will not move.

●The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.

Emergency towing

If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be

temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency

towing eyelet. This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads

for short distances at low speeds.

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The

vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in

good condition.

For vehicles with an automatic transmission, only the front towing

eyelet may be used.

If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by

any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional or a commercial towing service, using a

lift-type truck or a flat bed truck.

Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/pro-

vincial and local laws.

If towing from the rear, the vehicle's front wheels and axles must be

in good condition. (P. 415)

If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flat bed truck.

410

5-1. Essential information

86_EE (OM18089E)

Towing eyelet

■Before emergency towing

Release the parking brake.

Shift the shift lever to N.

Vehicles without a smart entry & start system: Turn the engine

switch to the “ACC” (engine off) or “ON” (engine running) position.

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system: Turn the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY (engine off) or IGNITION

ON (engine running) mode.

■If towing a vehicle

Do not tow another vehicle. If towing a vehicle that has broken down is

unavoidable, avoid towing a vehicle that is heavier than your vehicle. Also,

do not pull out a vehicle that has fallen into a ditch.

WARNING

■Caution while towing

●Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.

Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive

stress on the emergency towing eyelets and the cables or chains. Always

be cautious of the surroundings and other vehicles while towing.

●If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering

will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.

STEP

411

5-1. Essential information

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

NOTICE

■To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission in emergency

towing (vehicles with an automatic transmission)

Never tow a vehicle from the rear with four wheels on the ground. This may

cause serious damage to the transmission.

■To prevent damage to the vehicle

●When towing this vehicle, make sure to observe the following:

• Do not use a wire rope

• Keep vehicle speed below 30 km/h (20 mph) and do not tow for dis-

tances over 30 km (19 miles)

• Tow the vehicle in the forward direction

• Do not apply rope to the vehicle's suspension and so forth

●Do not tow another vehicle, boat (trailer) and so forth, that is heavier than

this vehicle.

■When towing down a long slope

Use a wheel lift-type or flat bed truck. (P. 415, 416)

If a wheel lift-type or flat bed truck is not used, the brakes may overheat,

leading to poor brake performance.

412

5-1. Essential information

86_EE (OM18089E)

Installing a towing eyelet

Remove the eyelet cover(s).

To prevent damage to the vehicle, cover the tip of the screwdriver

with a rag.

Front

Remove the upper cover using a

flathead screwdriver and then

pull the lower cover outward by

hand to remove it

Upper cover

Lower cover

Rear

STEP

413

5-1. Essential information

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

Insert the towing eyelet into the

hole and tighten partially by

hand.

Tighten down the towing eyelet

securely using a wheel nut

wrench.

STEP

■Location of the emergency towing eyelet

P. 449, 462

WARNING

■Installing towing eyelets to the vehicle

Make sure that towing eyelet is installed securely.

If not securely installed, towing eyelets may come loose during towing. This

may lead to accidents that cause serious injury or even death.

■After towing

●Always remove the towing eyelet. Failure to do so can cause the SRS

airbags to not operate correctly in the event of a frontal collision.

●Always remove the towing eyelets. Failure to do so may prevent the fuel

pump shut off system from operating properly if the vehicle receives an

impact from the rear.

414

5-1. Essential information

86_EE (OM18089E)

Towing with a sling-type truck

NOTICE

■To prevent body damage

Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.

415

5-1. Essential information

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

Towing with a wheel lift-type truck

From the front

Vehicles with an automatic trans-

mission: Use a towing dolly

under the rear wheels.

Vehicles with a manual transmis-

sion: We recommend using a

towing dolly under the rear

wheels.

When not using a towing dolly,

release the parking brake and

shift the shift lever to N.

From the rear

Vehicles without a smart entry &

start system: Turn the engine

switch to the “ACC” position so

that the steering wheel is

unlocked.

Vehicles with a smart entry &

start system: Turn the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch to

ACCESSORY mode so that the

steering wheel is unlocked.

416

5-1. Essential information

86_EE (OM18089E)

Using a flat bed truck

If you use chains or cables to tie

down your vehicle, the angles

shaded in black must be 45.

Do not overly tighten the tie

downs or the vehicle may be

damaged.

NOTICE

■To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission when towing

using a wheel-lift type truck (vehicles with an automatic transmission)

Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground.

■To prevent damaging the vehicle

●Vehicles without a smart entry & start system: Do not tow the vehicle from

the rear when the engine switch is in the “LOCK” position or the key is

removed. The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the

front wheels straight.

●Vehicles with a smart entry & start system: Do not tow the vehicle from the

rear when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is off. The steering lock

mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.

●When raising the vehicle from the rear, ensure adequate ground clearance

for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate

clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed from the rear.

417

5-1. Essential information

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

If you think something is wrong

If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably

needs adjustment or repair. Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional as

soon as possible.

■Visible symptoms

●Fluid leaks under the vehicle

(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)

●Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear

●Vehicles with a monochrome multi-information display: The

engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points

higher than normal

●Vehicles with a color multi-information display: The high

engine coolant temperature warning light flashes or illumi-

nates

■Audible symptoms

●Changes in exhaust sound

●Excessive tire squeal when cornering

●Strange noises related to the suspension system

●Pinging or other noises related to the engine

■Operational symptoms

●Engine missing, stumbling or running rough

●Appreciable loss of power

●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking

●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road

●Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost

touches the floor

418

5-1. Essential information

86_EE (OM18089E)

Fuel pump shut off system

Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is

activated.

Vehicles without a smart entry & start system

Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

Restart the engine.

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY mode

or turn it off.

Restart the engine.

NOTICE

■Before starting the engine

Inspect the ground under the vehicle.

If you find that fuel has leaked on to the ground, the fuel system has been

damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.

When the vehicle sustains an impact in an accident, etc., the fuel

pump shut off system operates to stop supplying fuel in order to

minimize fuel leakage.

STEP

419

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...

Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle

may be dangerous.

The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake sys-

tem. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact any

authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

Warning light Warning light/Details

Brake system warning light

• Low brake fluid

• Malfunction in the brake system

This light also comes on when the parking brake is not

released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully

released the system is operating normally.

Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn

on or flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does

not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.

420

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

Stop the vehicle immediately.

The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehi-

cle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a

safe place and contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional.

Warning light Warning light/Details

Charging system warning light

Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system.

Low engine oil pressure warning light

Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low.

(Flashes or illu-

minates in red)

High engine coolant temperature warning light (if

equipped)

Indicates that the engine is almost overheating. (P. 488)

As the engine coolant temperature increases, this warning

light will change from flashing to constantly illuminated.

421

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

Have the vehicle inspected immediately.

Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to

the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.

Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional immedi-

ately.

Warning light Warning light/Details

Malfunction indicator lamp

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The electronic engine control system;

• The electronic throttle control system;

• The electronic automatic transmission control system.

SRS warning light

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The SRS airbag system;

• The seat belt pretensioner system.

ABS warning light

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The ABS;

• The brake assist system.

Electric power steering warning light (warning buzzer)

Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steer-

ing) system.

Slip indicator

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The VSC system;

• The TRC system;

• The hill-start assist control system.

Automatic headlight leveling system warning light

Indicates a malfunction in the automatic headlight leveling

system.

LED headlight warning light

Indicates a malfunction in the LED headlights.

422

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

(Comes on in

yellow)

Cruise control indicator light (if equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the cruise control system.

■If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving

The malfunction indicator lamp will come on if the fuel tank becomes com-

pletely empty. If the fuel tank is empty, refuel the vehicle immediately. The

malfunction indicator lamp will go off after several trips.

If the malfunction indicator lamp does not go off, contact any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional as soon as possible.

■Electric power steering warning light (warning buzzer)

The electric power steering warning light may come on and the warning

buzzer may sound when the voltage is low or the voltage drops.

WARNING

■When the electric power steering warning light comes on

The steering wheel may become extremely heavy.

If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, hold

firmly and operate using more force than usual.

Warning light Warning light/Details

423

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

Follow the correction procedures.

After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,

check that the warning light turns off.

Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure

Open door warning light (if

equipped)

Indicates that a door or the

trunk is not fully closed.

Check that both side doors

and the trunk are closed.

(Comes on in

yellow)

Low fuel level warning

light

Remaining fuel

(Approximately 7.0 L

[1.8 gal., 1.5 Imp. gal.] or

less)

Refuel the vehicle.

(On the instru-

ment cluster)

Driver’s seat belt

reminder light

(warning buzzer)*

Warns the driver to fasten

his/her seat belt.

Fasten the seat belt.

(On the center

panel)

Front passenger’s seat

belt reminder light

(warning buzzer)*

Warns the front passenger

to fasten his or her seat

belt.

Fasten the seat belt.

424

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

Tire pressure warning

light

When the light comes on:

Low tire inflation pressure

such as

• Natural causes (P. 425)

• Flat tire (P. 446, 462)

Adjust the tire inflation pres-

sure (including the spare

tire) to the specified level.

The light will turn off after a

few minutes. In case the

light does not turn off even

if the tire inflation pressure

is adjusted, have the sys-

tem checked by any autho-

rized Toyota dealer or

repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped pro-

fessional.

When the light comes on

after blinking for 1 minute:

Malfunction in the tire pres-

sure warning system

(P. 426)

Have the system checked by

any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped

professional.

Automatic transmission

fluid temperature warning

light (if equipped)

Indicates that the auto-

matic transmission fluid

temperature is too high.

Stop the vehicle in a safe

place and shift the shift lever

to P.

If the light goes off after a lit-

tle while, the vehicle can be

driven. If the light does not

go off, contact any autho-

rized Toyota dealer or

repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped pro-

fessional.

Master warning light (if

equipped)

A buzzer sounds and the

warning light comes on and

flashes to indicate that the

master warning system has

detected a malfunction.

P. 428

Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure

425

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

: Driver's and front passenger’s seat belt buzzer:

The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver

and front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer

sounds for 30 seconds after the vehicle has reached a speed of at least 20

km/h (12 mph). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound

in a different tone for 90 more seconds.

■Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder

and warning buzzer

●If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger

detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and warning

buzzer to sound, even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.

●If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passen-

ger, and the warning light may not operate properly.

■When the tire pressure warning light comes on

Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing

the tire pressure warning reset switch will not turn off the tire pressure warn-

ing light.

■The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes

The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as

natural air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In

this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light

(after a few minutes).

426

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

■If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative

The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following conditions:

(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)

●If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

are used.

●If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not

registered in the tire pressure warning computer.

●If the tire inflation pressure is 380 kPa (3.87 kgf/cm

or bar, 55 psi) or

higher.

The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following condi-

tions:

(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)

●If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are

nearby.

●If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle.

●If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.

●If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the

wheels or wheel housings.

●If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used. (Even if you use Toyota wheels,

the tire pressure warning system may not work properly with some types

of tires.)

●If tire chains are used.

●If a large metallic object which can interfere with signal reception is put in

the trunk.

■If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for

approximately one minute

If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for

approximately one minute when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is

turned to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart entry & start system) or

the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without a smart

entry & start system), have it checked by any authorized Toyota dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

427

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■If the tire pressure warning light comes on

Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause

loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.

●Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire infla-

tion pressure immediately.

●If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure

adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If the

tire is flat, change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the

nearest any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional.

●Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you

could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.

■If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur

The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.

NOTICE

■To ensure the tire pressure warning system operates properly

Do not install tires with different specifications or makers, as the tire pres-

sure warning system may not operate properly.

428

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

If a warning message is displayed (vehicles with a color multi-information display)

Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle

may be dangerous.

The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake sys-

tem. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact any

authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

Warning message Details

Indicates that:

• The brake fluid level is low; or

• The brake system is malfunctioning

A buzzer also sounds.

If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and

perform the following actions:

Master warning light

The master warning light also

comes on or flashes in order to

indicate that a message is cur-

rently being displayed on the

multi-information display.

Multi-information display

If any of the warning light comes on again after the following

actions have been performed, contact any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional.

429

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

Stop the vehicle immediately.

The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehi-

cle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a

safe place and contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional.

Warning message Details

(Comes on in red)

Indicates that the engine is almost overheating.

(P. 488)

A buzzer also sounds.

430

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

Have the vehicle inspected immediately.

Failure to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to

the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.

Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional immedi-

ately.

Warning message Details

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The SRS airbag system;

• The seat belt pretensioner system.

A buzzer also sounds.

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The ABS;

• The brake assist system.

A buzzer also sounds.

Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power

Steering) system.

A buzzer also sounds.

431

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

(Flashes)

(Flashes in yellow)

Indicates a malfunction in the smart entry & start

system.

A buzzer also sounds.

Warning message Details

432

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

Follow the correction procedures.

After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,

check that the warning message and light go off.

Warning message Details Correction procedure

Indicates that one or

more of the doors is

not fully closed

The system also indi-

cates which doors are

not fully closed.

If the vehicle reaches

a speed of 5 km/h

(3 mph),

flashes to indicate

that the door(s) are

not yet fully closed.

Make sure that both

side doors are closed.

Indicates that the trunk

is not fully closed

If the vehicle reaches

a speed of 5 km/h

(3 mph),

flashes to indicate

that the trunk is not

yet fully closed.

Close the trunk.

433

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

(Vehicles with an auto-

matic transmission)

Indicates that the auto-

matic transmission fluid

temperature is too

high.

A buzzer also

sounds.

Stop the vehicle in a

safe place and shift the

shift lever to P.

If the message is

cleared after a little

while, the vehicle can

be driven. If the mes-

sage is not cleared,

contact any authorized

Toyota dealer or

repairer, or another

duly qualified and

equipped professional.

(Flashes)

Indicates that the

“ENGINE START

STOP” switch is turned

off and the driver’s door

is opened while the

lights are turned on.

A buzzer also

sounds.

Turn the lights off.

Warning message Details Correction procedure

434

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

*: This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a

result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.

(Comes on in yellow)

Indicates that remain-

ing fuel is approxi-

mately 7.0 L (1.8 gal.,

1.5 Imp. gal.) or less

The estimated

remaining driving

range will be dis-

played under this

warning message.*

Refuel the vehicle.

Roads may be icy due

to the low outside tem-

perature.

Drive carefully avoiding

sudden acceleration,

sudden braking, sud-

den deceleration, and

sharp turns.

Warning message Details Correction procedure

435

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

Have the malfunction repaired immediately.

After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,

check that the warning message and light go off.

Interior

buzzer

Exterior

buzzer

Warning message Details Correction

procedure

Once 

(Flashes)

(Flashes in yellow)

Indicates that the

electronic key is

not present when

attempting to

start the engine.

Confirm

the loca-

tion of the

electronic

key.

Once

3 times

(Flashes)

(Flashes in yellow)

Indicates that a

door other than

the driver’s door

has been opened

and closed with

the “ENGINE

START STOP”

switch in any

mode other than

off and the elec-

tronic key out-

side of the

detection area.

Confirm

the loca-

tion of the

electronic

key.

436

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

Once

3 times

(Flashes)

(Flashes in yellow)

(Vehicles with an auto-

matic transmission)

The electronic

key was carried

outside the vehi-

cle and the

driver’s door

was opened

and closed

while the shift

position P was

selected with-

out turning off

the “ENGINE

START STOP”

switch.

Turn the

“ENGINE

START

STOP”

switch off

or bring

the elec-

tronic key

back into

the vehi-

cle.

Once

3 times

(Flashes)

(Flashes in yellow)

(Vehicles with a manual

transmission)

The electronic

key was carried

outside the vehi-

cle and the

driver’s door

was opened

and closed

while the shift

position N was

selected with-

out turning off

the “ENGINE

START STOP”

switch.

Turn the

“ENGINE

START

STOP”

switch off

or bring

the elec-

tronic key

back into

the vehi-

cle.

Interior

buzzer

Exterior

buzzer

Warning message Details Correction

procedure

437

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

Once

Contin-

uous

(5 sec-

onds)

(Displayed alternately)

(Flashes)

(Flashes in yellow)

An attempt was

made to exit the

vehicle with the

electronic key

and touch the

lock sensor to

lock the doors

without first turn-

ing the “ENGINE

START STOP”

switch off.

Turn the

“ENGINE

START

STOP”

switch off

and lock

the doors

again.

Intermit-

tently (7

seconds)



(Flashes)

(Flashes in yellow)

An attempt was

made to drive

when the regular

key was not

inside the vehi-

cle.

Confirm

that the

electronic

key is

inside the

vehicle.

Interior

buzzer

Exterior

buzzer

Warning message Details Correction

procedure

438

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

Contin-

uous



(Flashes)

(Vehicles with an auto-

matic transmission)

The driver’s door

was opened

while any shift

position other

than P was

selected without

turning off the

“ENGINE START

STOP” switch.

Shift the

shift lever

to P.

Contin-

uous

Contin-

uous

(Displayed alternately)

(Flashes)

(Flashes in yellow)

(Vehicles with an auto-

matic transmission)

The electronic

key was carried

outside the vehi-

cle and the

driver’s door was

opened and

closed while any

shift position

other than P was

selected without

turning off the

“ENGINE START

STOP” switch.

• Shift the

shift lever

to P.

• Bring the

electronic

key back

into the

vehicle.

Interior

buzzer

Exterior

buzzer

Warning message Details Correction

procedure

439

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)



Contin-

uous

(5 sec-

onds)

(Flashes)

An attempt was

made to lock the

doors using the

smart entry &

start system

while the elec-

tronic key was

still inside the

vehicle.

Retrieve

the elec-

tronic key

from the

vehicle

and lock

the doors

again.

Once

Contin-

uous

(5 sec-

onds)

(Flashes)

An attempt was

made to lock

either door by

opening a door

and putting the

lock lever into the

lock position,

then closing the

door by pulling on

the outside door

handle with the

electronic key still

inside the vehi-

cle.

Retrieve

the elec-

tronic key

from the

vehicle

and lock

the doors

again.

Interior

buzzer

Exterior

buzzer

Warning message Details Correction

procedure

440

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

Once (Flashes)

(Flashes in yellow)

(Vehicles with an auto-

matic transmission)

• When the doors

were unlocked

with the mechani-

cal key and then

the “ENGINE

START STOP”

switch was

pressed, the

electronic key

could not be

detected in the

vehicle.

• The electronic

key could not be

detected in the

vehicle even after

the “ENGINE

START STOP”

switch was

pressed two con-

secutive times.

Touch the

electronic

key to the

“ENGINE

START

STOP”

switch

while

depress-

ing the

brake

pedal.

Interior

buzzer

Exterior

buzzer

Warning message Details Correction

procedure

441

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

Once (Flashes)

(Flashes in yellow)

(Vehicles with a manual

transmission)

• When the doors

were unlocked

with the mechani-

cal key and then

the “ENGINE

START STOP”

switch was

pressed, the

electronic key

could not be

detected in the

vehicle.

• The electronic

key could not be

detected in the

vehicle even after

the “ENGINE

START STOP”

switch was

pressed two con-

secutive times.

Touch the

electronic

key to the

“ENGINE

START

STOP”

switch

while

depress-

ing the

clutch

pedal.

Once 

(Flashes)

(Vehicles with an auto-

matic transmission)

An attempt was

made to start the

engine with the

shift lever in an

incorrect position.

Shift the

shift lever

to P and

start the

engine.

Interior

buzzer

Exterior

buzzer

Warning message Details Correction

procedure

442

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)



Power was

turned off due to

the automatic

power off func-

tion.

Next time

when

starting

the

engine,

increase

the engine

speed

slightly

and main-

tain that

level for

approxi-

mately 5

minutes to

recharge

the bat-

tery.

Once 

(Flashes in yellow)

Indicates that the

electronic key

battery is low.

Replace

the bat-

tery.

(P. 384)

Interior

buzzer

Exterior

buzzer

Warning message Details Correction

procedure

443

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

Once 

(Flashes)

(Vehicles with an auto-

matic transmission)

The driver’s door

was opened and

closed with the

“ENGINE START

STOP” switch

turned off and

then the

“ENGINE START

STOP” switch

was put in

ACCESSORY

mode twice with-

out the engine

being started.

Press the

“ENGINE

START

STOP”

switch

while

depress-

ing the

brake

pedal.

During an engine

starting proce-

dure in the event

that the electronic

key was not func-

tioning properly

(P. 480), the

“ENGINE START

STOP” switch

was touched with

the electronic

key.

Press the

“ENGINE

START

STOP”

switch

while

depress-

ing the

brake

pedal

within 10

seconds

of the

buzzer

sounding.

Interior

buzzer

Exterior

buzzer

Warning message Details Correction

procedure

444

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

Once 

(Flashes)

(Vehicles with a manual

transmission)

The driver’s door

was opened and

closed with the

“ENGINE START

STOP” switch

turned off and

then the

“ENGINE START

STOP” switch

was put in

ACCESSORY

mode twice with-

out the engine

being started.

Press the

“ENGINE

START

STOP”

switch

while

depress-

ing the

clutch

pedal.

During an engine

starting proce-

dure in the event

that the electronic

key was not func-

tioning properly

(P. 480), the

“ENGINE START

STOP” switch

was touched with

the electronic

key.

Press the

“ENGINE

START

STOP”

switch

while

depress-

ing the

clutch

pedal

within 10

seconds

of the

buzzer

sounding.

Interior

buzzer

Exterior

buzzer

Warning message Details Correction

procedure

445

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

Once 

(Flashes)

(Flashes quickly in green)

Indicates that the

steering lock has

not been

released.

Release

the steer-

ing lock.

(P. 204)

Con-

tinu-

ous



(Flashes)

(Vehicles with an auto-

matic transmission)

The “ENGINE

START STOP”

switch has been

turned off with the

shift lever in a

position other

than P.

Shift the

shift lever

to P.

Once 

(Flashes)

(Vehicles with an auto-

matic transmission)

After the

“ENGINE START

STOP” switch

has been turned

off with the shift

lever in a posi-

tion other than P,

the shift lever has

been shifted to P.

Turn the

“ENGINE

START

STOP”

switch off.

■Warning buzzer

In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard because of noisy place or an

audio sound.

Interior

buzzer

Exterior

buzzer

Warning message Details Correction

procedure

446

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

If you have a flat tire (vehicles with an emergency tire puncture repair kit)

Your vehicle is not equipped with a spare tire, but instead is

equipped with an emergency tire puncture repair kit.

A puncture caused by a nail or screw passing through the tire tread

can be repaired temporarily using the emergency tire puncture repair

kit. (The kit contains a bottle of sealant. The sealant can be used only

once to temporarily repair one tire without removing the nail or

screw from the tire.) Depending on the damage, this kit cannot be

used to repair the tire. (P. 448)

After temporarily repairing the tire with the kit, have the tire repaired

or replaced by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional. Repairs conducted using

the emergency tire puncture repair kit are only a temporary measure.

Have the tire repaired and replaced as soon as possible.

447

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Before repairing the tire

●Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface.

●Set the parking brake.

●Shift the shift lever to P (vehicles with an automatic transmis-

sion) or N (vehicles with a manual transmission).

●Stop the engine.

●Turn on the emergency flashers. (P. 408)

●Check the degree of the tire

damage.

• Do not remove the nail or

screw from the tire.

Removing the object may

widen the opening and

prevent emergency repair

with the repair kit.

• To avoid sealant leakage,

move the vehicle until the

area of the puncture, if

known, is positioned at

the top of the tire.

448

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

■A flat tire that cannot be repaired with the emergency tire puncture

repair kit

In the following cases, the tire cannot be repaired with the emergency tire

puncture repair kit. Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional.

●When the tire is damaged due to driving without sufficient air pressure

●When there are any cracks or damage at any location on the tire, such as

on the side wall, except the tread

●When the tire is visibly separated from the wheel

●When the cut or damage to the tread is 4 mm (0.16 in.) long or more

●When the wheel is damaged

●When two or more tires have been punctured (the sealant can be used

only once to temporarily repair one tire)

●When more than 2 sharp objects such as nails or screws have passed

through the tread on a single tire

●When the sealant has expired

449

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Location of the emergency tire puncture repair kit, jack and

tools

*: Use of the jack (P. 464)

■Contents

Screwdriver

Emergency

tire puncture

repair kit

Jack handle

Towing eyelet

Jack* Wheel nut

wrench

Sealant

Injection

hose Valve core tool

Valve core

(spare)

Compressor

Stickers

Extension hose (for

extracting the sealant)

Quick reference

450

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

Taking out the emergency tire puncture repair kit

Vehicles with a luggage mat:

Remove the luggage mat.

Take out the emergency tire puncture repair kit.

Emergency repair method

Shake the sealant bottle up and down several times and

remove the cap of the sealant bottle.

Connect the injection hose by

screwing onto the sealant. As it

is screwed in, the aluminum seal

on the bottle will be torn.

Position the nail or screw that

has punctured the tire at the bot-

tom, in contact with the ground.

Remove the cap from the valve.

STEP

Injection

hose

Sealant

STEP

Valve Cap

451

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

Bring the protruding part of the

valve core tool into contact with

the valve to discharge air.

Pull out the valve core by turning

it counterclockwise using the

valve core tool.

Remove the plug from the injec-

tion hose.

Connect the injection hose to the

valve.

STEP

Valve Protruding part

Valve core

tool

STEP

Valve core

STEP

Plug

Injection

hose

STEP

Valve

Injection

hose

452

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

Inject the sealant that is in the

bottle. Hold and tilt the bottle,

then squeeze sealant out of the

bottle as shown.

Remove the injection hose from

the valve and screw the valve

core in the valve securely by

turning it clockwise with the

valve core tool.

Attach the sticker as shown.

Remove any dirt and moisture

from the wheel before attaching

the label. If it is impossible to

attach the label, make sure to tell

any authorized Toyota dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional when

you have them repair and replace

the tire that sealant is injected.

Store the kit and then attach the

sticker as shown.

STEP

Valve

core tool

Valve core

STEP

453

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

Connect the compressor power

plug to the power outlet.

Vehicles without a smart entry &

start system: The engine switch

must be in the “ACC” position.

Vehicles with a smart entry & start

system: The “ENGINE START

STOP” switch must be in ACCES-

SORY mode.

Connect the air compressor

hose by threading it on the valve.

Left-hand drive vehicles: Check

the specified inflation pressure.

The label is placed as shown in

the illustration.

Right-hand drive vehicles: Check

the specified inflation pressure.

The label is placed as shown in

the illustration.

Power

outlet

STEP

Power plug

STEP

Compressor

Hose

STEP

454

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

Turn the compressor switch “ON”

and fill the tire with air until the

specified inflation pressure is

reached.

Turn the switch “OFF” when the pressure gauge connected to

the hose reads the specified pressure.

If the inflation pressure is not attained within 10 minutes, emergency

repair is not possible due to severe damage. Contact any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-

fessional.

After completely filling the tire with air, disconnect the hose

from the valve on the tire and pull the power plug of the com-

pressor out of the power outlet on the vehicle.

To spread the liquid sealant evenly in the tire, immediately

drive for about 10 minutes.

After driving about 10 minutes,

pull your vehicle over in a safe

place and reconnect the com-

pressor.

STEP

Switch

STEP

455

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

Read the inflation pressure on

the pressure gauge.

If the pressure is 130 kPa (1.3

kgf/cm

or bar, 19 psi) or above,

fill the tire with air using the com-

pressor until the specified infla-

tion pressure is reached.

If the pressure is less than 130

kPa (1.3 kgf/cm

or bar, 19 psi),

the emergency repair that have

been performed is not safe for

use as damage to the tire is too

severe. Do not continue to drive

the vehicle. Contact any autho-

rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

Taking precautions to avoid sudden braking, sudden accelera-

tion and sharp turns, drive carefully at under 80 km/h (50

mph) to the nearest authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional for tire repair

or replacement.

STEP

456

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

■After a tire is repaired with the emergency tire puncture repair kit

●The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter should be replaced.

●Even if the tire inflation pressure is at the recommended level, the tire

pressure warning light may come on/flash.

■Note for checking the emergency tire puncture repair kit

Check the sealant expiry date occasionally.

The expiry date is shown on the bottle. Do not use sealant whose expiry

date has already passed. Otherwise, repairs conducted using the emer-

gency tire puncture repair kit may not be performed properly.

■Emergency tire puncture repair kit

●The sealant stored in the emergency tire puncture repair kit can be used

only once to temporarily repair a single tire. If the sealant has been used

and needs to be replaced, purchase a new bottle at any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional. The compressor is reusable.

●The sealant can be used when the outside temperature is -40°C (-40°F)

or more.

●The repair kit is exclusively designed for size and type of tires originally

installed on your vehicle. Do not use it for tires that a different size than

the original ones, or for any other purposes.

●The sealant has a limited lifespan. The expiry date is marked on the bot-

tle. The bottle of sealant should be replaced with a new bottle before the

expiry date. Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional for replacement.

●If the sealant gets on your clothes, it may stain.

●If the sealant adheres to a wheel or the surface of the vehicle body, the

stain may not be removable if it is not cleaned at once. Immediately wipe

away the sealant with a wet cloth.

●During operation of the repair kit, a loud operation noise is produced.

This does not indicate a malfunction.

●Do not use to check or to adjust the tire pressure.

457

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire

Do not continue driving with a flat tire.

Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the

wheel beyond repair.

Driving with a flat tire may cause a circumferential groove on the side wall. In

such a case, the tire may explode when using a repair kit.

■Caution while driving

●Store the repair kit in the trunk.

Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

●The repair kit is exclusively only for your vehicle.

Do not use repair kit on other vehicles, which could lead to an accident

causing death or serious injury.

●Do not use repair kit for tires that are different size than the original ones,

or for any other purpose. If the tires have not been completely repaired, it

could lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.

■Precautions for use of the sealant

●Ingesting the sealant is hazardous to your health. If you ingest sealant,

consume as much water as possible, and then immediately consult a doc-

tor.

●If sealant gets in eyes or adheres to skin, immediately wash it off with

water. If discomfort persists, consult a doctor.

458

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■When fixing the flat tire

●Stop your vehicle in a safe and flat area.

●If force is used to turn the valve core tool while air remains in the tire, spe-

cial care should be taken because the valve core could fly out.

●Be careful, as sealant may fly out if you shake the bottle with the hose

installed.

●Do not touch the wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after

the vehicle has been driven.

After the vehicle has been driven, the wheels and the area around the

brakes may be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or

other body parts may result in burns.

●Connect the valve and hose securely with the tire installed on the vehicle.

If the hose is not properly connected to the valve, air leakage may occur

as sealant may be sprayed out.

●If the hose comes off the valve while inflating the tire, there is a risk that

the hose will move abruptly due to air pressure.

●After inflation of the tire has completed, the sealant may splatter when the

hose is disconnected or some air is let out of the tire.

●Follow the operation procedure to repair the tire. If the procedures not fol-

lowed, the sealant may spray out.

●Keep back from the tire while it is being repaired, as there is a chance of it

bursting while the repair operation is being performed. If you notice any

cracks or deformation of the tire, turn off the compressor switch and stop

the repair operation immediately.

●The repair kit may overheat if operated for a long period of time. Do not

operate the repair kit continuously for more than 10 minutes.

●Parts of the repair kit become hot during operation. Be careful when han-

dling the repair kit during and after operation. Do not touch the metal part

around the connecting area between the bottle and compressor. It will be

extremely hot.

●Do not attach the vehicle speed warning sticker to an area other than the

one indicated. If the sticker is attached to an area where an SRS airbag is

located, such as the pad of the steering wheel, it may prevent the SRS

airbag from operating properly.

459

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■Driving to spread the liquid sealant evenly

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or

serious injury.

●Drive the vehicle carefully at a low speed. Be especially careful when turn-

ing and cornering.

●If the vehicle does not drive straight or you feel a pull through the steering

wheel, stop the vehicle and check the following.

• Tire condition. The tire may have separated from the wheel.

• Tire inflation pressure. If the tire inflation pressure is 130 kPa (1.3

kgf/cm

or bar, 19 psi) or less, the tire may be severely damaged.

460

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

NOTICE

■When performing an emergency repair

●A tire should only be repaired with the emergency tire puncture repair kit if

the damage is caused by a sharp object such as nail or screw passing

through the tire tread.

Do not remove the sharp object from the tire. Removing the object may

widen the opening and disenable emergency repair with the repair kit.

●The repair kit is not waterproof. Make sure that the repair kit is not

exposed to water, such as when it is being used in the rain.

●Do not put the repair kit directly onto dusty ground such as sand at the

side of the road. If the repair kit vacuums up dust etc., a malfunction may

occur.

●Do not put the valve core on dirty ground or in the sand.

Store it in a clean place.

●Do not remove the inside cap of the sealant bottle.

●Turn the valve core tool with your hand when screwing it in. If you use

another tool in conjunction with the valve core tool, damage may occur.

■Precautions for the emergency tire puncture repair kit

●The repair kit power source should be 12 V DC suitable for vehicle use. Do

not connect the repair kit to any other source.

●If gasoline splatters on the repair kit, the repair kit may deteriorate. Take

care not to allow gasoline to contact it.

●Place the repair kit in a storage to prevent it from being exposed to dirt or

water.

●Store the repair kit in the trunk out of reach of children.

●Do not disassemble or modify the repair kit. Do not subject parts such as

the air pressure indicator to impacts. This may cause a malfunction.

461

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

NOTICE

■To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve

and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact

any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional or other qualified service shop as soon as possible.

After use of liquid sealant, make sure to replace the tire pressure warning

valve and transmitter when repairing or replacing the tire. (P. 367)

462

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

If you have a flat tire (vehicles with a spare tire)

Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. The flat tire can be

replaced with the spare tire.

■Before jacking up the vehicle

●Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface.

●Set the parking brake.

●Shift the shift lever to P (vehicles with an automatic transmis-

sion) or R (vehicles with a manual transmission).

●Stop the engine.

●Turn on the emergency flashers. (P. 408)

■Location of the spare tire, jack and tools

Vehicles with a compact spare tire

Jack

Jack handle

Spare tire

Towing eyelet

Screwdriver

Wheel nut

wrench

463

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

Taking out the spare tire

Vehicles with a compact spare tire

Remove the luggage mat.

Remove the cover and loosen

the center fastener that secures

the spare tire.

Vehicles with a full-size spare tire

Jack handle

Spare tire

Towing eyelet

Screwdriver

Jack

Wheel nut

wrench

STEP

464

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

Vehicles with a full-size spare tire

Loosen the center fastener that

secures the spare tire.

Replacing a flat tire

Chock the tires.

STEP

Flat tire Wheel chock

positions

Front

Left-

hand

side

Behind the

rear right-

hand side

tire

Right-

hand

side

Behind the

rear left-

hand side

tire

Rear

Left-

hand

side

In front of

the front

right-hand

side tire

Right-

hand

side

In front of

the front

left-hand

side tire

465

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

Slightly loosen the wheel nuts

(one turn).

Turn the tire jack portion “A” by

hand until the notch of the jack is

in contact with the jack point.

Raise the vehicle until the tire is

slightly raised off the ground.

Remove all the wheel nuts and

the tire.

When resting the tire on the

ground, place the tire so that the

wheel design faces up to avoid

scratching the wheel surface.

STEP

466

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

Installing the spare tire

Remove any dirt or foreign mat-

ter from the wheel contact sur-

face.

If foreign matter is on the wheel

contact surface, the wheel nuts

may loosen while the vehicle is in

motion, and the tire may come off

the vehicle.

Install the spare tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by

hand to approximately the same amount.

Vehicles with a compact spare

tire: Tighten the wheel nuts until

the tapered portion comes into

loose contact with the disc wheel

seat.

Vehicles with a full-size spare

tire: Tighten the wheel nuts until

the tapered portion comes into

loose contact with the disc

wheel.

STEP

Tapered portion

Disc wheel

seat

Disc wheel

Tapered portion

467

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

Lower the vehicle.

Firmly tighten each nut two or

three times in the order shown in

the illustration.

Tightening torque:

120 N•m (12.2 kgf•m, 89 ft•lbf)

Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.

STEP

■The compact spare tire (vehicles with a compact spare tire)

●The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE

ONLY” on the tire sidewall.

Use the compact spare tire temporarily only in an emergency.

●Make sure to check the tire pressure of the compact spare tire.

(



P. 507)

■

When using the compact spare tire

As the compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning

valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be

warned. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure

warning light comes on, the light remains on.

STEP

468

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

■If you have a flat rear tire (vehicles with a compact spare tire)

Install the compact spare tire on the front of the vehicle. Perform the follow-

ing steps.

Replace a front tire with the compact spare tire.

Replace the flat rear tire with the tire removed from the front of the

vehicle.

■Storing the tire

Always install the center fastener as shown in the illustration below.

Compact spare tire

Except compact spare tire

■After completing the tire change

The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (P. 367)

STEP

469

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Certification for the jack

470

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■Using the tire jack

Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or serious injuries due to the

vehicle suddenly falling off the jack.

●Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or install-

ing and removing tire chains.

●Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.

Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replac-

ing tires on this vehicle.

●Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.

●Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by a jack.

●Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.

●Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.

●When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.

●Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace

the tire.

●Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.

Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working

on or near the vehicle may be injured.

471

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■Replacing a flat tire

●Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately

after the vehicle has been driven.

After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the

brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or

other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.

●Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the

wheel while the vehicle is moving.

●Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen

and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.

• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 120 N

•

m (12.2

kgf

•

m, 89 ft

•

lbf) as soon as possible after changing wheels.

• When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically

designed for that wheel.

• If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads

or bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by any autho-

rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped

professional.

• When installing the wheel nuts, be sure to install them with the tapered

ends facing inward. (P. 379)

■When using the compact spare tire (vehicles with a compact spare tire)

●Remember that your compact spare tire is specifically designed for use

with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle.

●Do not use two compact spare tires simultaneously.

●Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.

●Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting

operations that cause sudden engine braking.

●Install the compact spare tire on a front wheel.

472

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■When storing the compact spare tire (vehicles with a compact spare

tire)

Be careful not to catch fingers or other body parts between the compact

spare tire and the body of the vehicle.

■Speed limit when using the compact spare tire (vehicles with a com-

pact spare tire)

Do not drive at speeds in excess of 80 km/h (50 mph) when a compact spare

tire is installed on the vehicle.

The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failing to

observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious

injury.

■When the compact spare tire is attached

The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems

may not operate correctly:

●ABS & Brake assist

●VSC

●TRC

●

EPS

●Cruise control (if equipped)

473

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

NOTICE

■Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire.

Do not continue driving with a flat tire.

Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the

wheel beyond repair.

■Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire

installed on the vehicle. (vehicles with a compact spare tire)

The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire com-

pared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over

uneven road surfaces.

■Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire (vehicles with a

compact spare tire)

Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.

Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving per-

formance.

■Stowing the jack

When stowing the jack in the jack holder, make sure that the part that the

jack handle attaches to is pointing towards the inside of the trunk. Failure to

do so may damage the vehicle body.

■When replacing the tires

When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve

and transmitter, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional as the tire pressure warning valve

and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.

■To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve

and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact

any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional or other qualified service shop as soon as possible.

Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when

replacing the tire. (P. 367)

474

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

If the engine will not start

If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures

are being followed (P. 198, 207), consider each of the following

points.

■The engine will not start even when the starter motor oper-

ates normally.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem.

●There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.

Refuel the vehicle.

●The engine may be flooded.

Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting

procedures. (P. 198, 207)

●There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.

(P. 11 3 )

■The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and

headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at

a low volume.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem.

●The battery may be discharged. (P. 483)

●The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.

■The starter motor does not turn over. (vehicles with a smart

entry & start system)

The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an

electrical problem such as an open circuit or a blown fuse. How-

ever, an interim measure is available to start the engine.

(P. 475)

475

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

Emergency start function (vehicles with a smart entry & start system)

When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as

an interim measure to start the engine if the “ENGINE START STOP”

switch is functioning normally:

Vehicles with an automatic transmission

Set the parking brake.

Put the shift lever in P.

Set the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY

mode.

Press and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch about 15

seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly.

Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system

may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-

fessional.

■The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and

headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem.

●One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.

●The battery may be discharged. (P. 483)

●There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system. (vehi-

cles with a smart entry & start system)

Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional if the problem cannot be

repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.

STEP

476

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

Vehicles with a manual transmission

Set the parking brake.

Put the shift lever in N.

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY

mode.

Push and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for about

15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal and clutch

pedal firmly.

Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system

may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-

fessional.

STEP

477

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P (vehicles with an automatic transmission)

If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there

may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent

accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by

any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional immediately.

The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to

ensure that the shift lever can be shifted.

Set the parking brake.

Vehicles without a smart entry & start system: Turn the

engine switch to the “ACC” position.

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system: Turn the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY mode.

Depress the brake pedal.

Press the shift lock override

button.

The shift lever can be shifted

while the button is pressed.

STEP

478

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

If you lose your keys

New genuine keys can be made by any authorized Toyota dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional. For

vehicles without a smart entry & start system, bring a master key

and the key number stamped on the key number plate. For vehicles

with a smart entry & start system, bring the other key and the key

number stamped on the key number plate.

479

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

If the electronic key does not operate properly (vehicles with a smart entry & start system)

Unlocking and locking the doors, unlocking the trunk

Use the mechanical key built in to the electronic keys to operate the

doors and trunk. (P. 33)

Doors

Vehicles without a double

locking system

Locks driver’s door

Unlocks driver’s door

Vehicles with a double lock-

ing system

Locks both side doors

Unlocks both side doors

Trunk (left-hand drive vehicles only)

Turn the mechanical key clock-

wise to open.

If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is inter-

rupted (P. 41) or the electronic key cannot be used because the

battery is depleted, the smart entry & start system and wireless

remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and trunk

can be opened or the engine can be started by following the proce-

dure below.

480

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

Starting the engine

Vehicles with an automatic transmission

Ensure that the shift lever is in P and firmly depress the brake

pedal.

Touch the Toyota emblem side of

the electronic key to the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch.

When the electronic key is

detected, a buzzer sounds and

the “ENGINE START STOP”

switch will turn to IGNITION ON

mode.

When the smart entry & start sys-

tem is deactivated in

customization setting, the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch

will turn to ACCESSORY mode.

Firmly depress the brake pedal and check that the smart entry

& start system indicator light (green) turns on.

Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch.

In the event that the “ENGINE START STOP” switch still cannot be

operated, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional.

STEP

481

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

Vehicles with a manual transmission

Ensure that the shift lever is in N and depress the clutch

pedal.

Touch the Toyota emblem side of

the electronic key to the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch.

When the electronic key is

detected, a buzzer sounds and

the “ENGINE START STOP”

switch will turn to IGNITION ON

mode.

When the smart entry & start sys-

tem is deactivated in

customization setting, the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch

will turn to ACCESSORY mode.

Firmly depress the clutch pedal and check that the smart

entry & start system indicator light (green) turns on.

Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch.

In the event that the “ENGINE START STOP” switch still cannot be

operated, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional.

STEP

482

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Stopping the engine

Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Shift the shift lever to P and press

the “ENGINE START STOP” switch as you normally do when stopping the

engine.

Vehicles with a manual transmission: Shift the shift lever to N and press the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch as you normally do when stopping the

engine.

■Replacing the key battery

As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the

electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery depletes.

(P. 384)

■Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes

Vehicles with an automatic transmission

Release the brake pedal and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in

above.The engine does not start and modes will be changed each

time the switch is pressed. (P. 201)

Vehicles with a manual transmission

Release the clutch pedal and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in

above.The engine does not start and modes will be changed each

time the switch is pressed. (P. 201)

■If the doors cannot be locked or unlocked by the smart entry & start

system

Lock and unlock the doors by the mechanical key or wireless remote control.

STEP

483

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

If the battery is discharged

The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehi-

cle's battery is discharged.

You can call any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional or a qualified repair shop.

If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehi-

cle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle following

the steps below.

Connect the jumper cables according to the following pro-

cedures:

Left-hand drive vehicles

STEP

484

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

Right-hand drive vehicles

Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle

Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle

Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle

Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in

the illustration.

Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine

speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5

minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system only: Open and

close any of the doors of your vehicle with the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch off.

Vehicles without a smart entry & start system: Maintain the

engine speed of the second vehicle and turn the engine

switch to the “ON” position, then start the vehicle's engine.

Vehicles with a smart entry & start system: Maintain the

engine speed of the second vehicle and turn the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode, then start the

vehicle's engine.

STEP

485

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Starting the engine when the battery is discharged

The engine cannot be started by push-starting.

■Avoiding a discharged battery

●Turn off the headlights and the air conditioning system while the engine is

off.

●Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is run-

ning at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc.

■Charging the battery

The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the

vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of cer-

tain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may

discharge, and the engine may be unable to start. (The battery recharges

automatically during driving.)

■Precautions when the battery is discharged (vehicles with a smart

entry & start system)

●In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the smart

entry & start system when the battery is discharged. Use the wireless

remote control or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors.

●The engine may not start on the first attempt after the battery has

recharged but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a

malfunction.

Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper

cables in the exact reverse order in which they were con-

nected.

Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at any autho-

rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional as soon as possible.

STEP

486

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

●The “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode is memorized by the vehicle.

When the battery is reconnected, the system will return to the mode it

was in before the battery was discharged. Before disconnecting the bat-

tery, turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.

If you are unsure what mode the “ENGINE START STOP” switch was in

before the battery discharged, be especially careful when reconnecting

the battery.

WARNING

■Avoiding battery fires or explosions

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flam-

mable gas that may be emitted from the battery.

●Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it

is not unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended termi-

nal.

●Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” ter-

minals.

●Do not allow open flame or use matches, cigarette lighters or smoke near

the battery.

■Battery precautions

The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while

related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following pre-

cautions when handling the battery.

●When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care

not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing

or the vehicle body.

●Do not lean over the battery.

●In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes,

immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.

Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention

can be received.

●Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and

other battery-related parts.

●Do not allow children near the battery.

487

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■To prevent damage to the vehicle

Do not pull- or push-start the vehicle as the three-way catalytic converter

may overheat and become a fire hazard.

NOTICE

■When handling jumper cables

Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fans

or any of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.

■When closing the doors

While pushing the door glass towards the inside of the vehicle, slowly close

the door.

Because the side window open/close function linked to door operation will

not operate, the window may interfere with the vehicle body, possibly

scratching both the vehicle body and window, or even shattering the window.

488

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

If your vehicle overheats

Correction procedures

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air condition-

ing system, and then stop the engine.

If you see steam:

Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides.

If you do not see steam:

Carefully lift the hood.

After the engine has cooled

down sufficiently, inspect the

hoses and radiator core (radia-

tor) for any leaks.

Radiator

Cooling fans

If a large amount of coolant leaks,

immediately contact any autho-

rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating.

●Vehicles with a monochrome multi-information display: The

engine coolant temperature gauge (P. 224) enters the red

zone or a loss of engine power is experienced (for example, the

vehicle speed does not increase).

Vehicles with a color multi-information display: The high engine

coolant temperature warning light (P. 228) flashes or illumi-

nates or a loss of engine power is experienced (for example, the

vehicle speed does not increase).

●Steam comes out from under the hood.

STEP

489

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

The coolant level is satisfactory if

it is between the “FULL” and

“LOW” lines on the reservoir.

Reservoir

“FULL”

“LOW”

Radiator cap

Add coolant if necessary.

Water can be used in an emer-

gency if coolant is unavailable.

Start the engine and turn the air conditioning system on to

check that the radiator cooling fans operate and to check for

coolant leaks from the radiator or hoses.

The fans operate when the air conditioning system is turned on

immediately after a cold start. Confirm that the fans are operating by

checking the fan sound and air flow. If it is difficult to check these,

turn the air conditioning system on and off repeatedly.

(The fans may not operate in freezing temperatures.)

If the fans are not operating:

Stop the engine immediately and contact any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

If the fans are operating:

Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

STEP

490

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of

your vehicle

●If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until

the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, caus-

ing serious injuries such as burns.

●Keep hands and clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) away from

the fans and belts. Failure to do so may cause the hands or clothing to be

caught, resulting in serious injury.

●Do not loosen the radiator cap and the coolant reservoir cap while the

engine and radiator are hot.

Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam

released under pressure.

NOTICE

■When adding engine coolant

Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.

When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too

quickly can cause damage to the engine.

■To prevent damage to the cooling system

Observe the following precautions:

●Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust

etc.).

●Do not use any coolant additives.

491

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

If the vehicle becomes stuck

■When it is difficult to free the vehicle

Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle

becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow:

Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the shift

lever to P (vehicles with an automatic transmission) or N

(vehicles with a manual transmission).

Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the rear

wheels.

Place wood, stones or some other material under the rear

wheels to help provide traction.

Restart the engine.

Shift the shift lever to the D or R position (vehicles with an

automatic transmission) or 1 or R position (vehicles with a

manual transmission) and release the parking brake. Then,

while exercising caution, depress the accelerator pedal.

STEP

Press to turn off TRC.

492

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■When attempting to free a stuck vehicle

If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the sur-

rounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The

vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free.

Use extreme caution.

■When shifting the shift lever

For vehicles with an automatic transmission, be careful not to shift the shift

lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.

This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may

cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■To avoid damage to the transmission and other components

●Avoid spinning the rear wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more

than necessary.

●If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed,

the vehicle may require towing to be freed.

493

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

86_EE (OM18089E)

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency

Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the

vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following pro-

cedure:

Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly

depress it.

Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the

effort required to slow the vehicle.

Shift the shift lever to N.

If the shift lever is shifted to N

After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the

road.

Stop the engine.

If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N

Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce

vehicle speed as much as possible.

Vehicles without a smart entry

& start system: Stop the

engine by turning the engine

switch to the “ACC” position.

STEP

494

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

86_EE (OM18089E)

WARNING

■If the engine has to be turned off while driving

●Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the

brake pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn.

Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the engine.

●Vehicles without a smart entry & start system: Never attempt to remove

the key, as doing so will lock the steering wheel.

Vehicles with a smart entry &

start system: To stop the

engine, press and hold the

“ENGINE START STOP”

switch for 2 consecutive sec-

onds or more, or press it

briefly 3 times or more in suc-

cession.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.

Press and hold for 2 seconds or more,

or press briefly 3 times or more

STEP

Vehicle specifications

495

86_EE (OM18089E)

6-1. Specifications

Maintenance data

(fuel, oil level, etc.).......... 496

Fuel information................ 509

6-2. Customization

Customizable features...... 511

496

86_EE (OM18089E)

6-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)

Dimensions and weight

*: Unladen vehicle

Overall length 4240 mm (166.9 in.)

Overall width 1775 mm (69.9 in.)

Overall height*1320 mm (52.0 in.)

Wheelbase 2570 mm (101.2 in.)

Tread Front 1520 mm (59.8 in.)

Rear 1540 mm (60.6 in.)

Gross vehicle mass Details are described on the manufac-

turer’s label. (P. 497)

Maximum permissi-

ble axle capacity

Front 876 kg (1931 lb.)

Rear 943 kg (2079 lb.)

497

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

86_EE (OM18089E)

Vehicle identification

■Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for

your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your

Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.

This number is stamped under

the right-hand front seat.

This number is located on the

top left of the body panel.

This number is also on the man-

ufacturer’s label.

498

6-1. Specifications

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Engine number

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.

499

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

86_EE (OM18089E)

Engine

Fuel

*: If unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 98 RON is not available,

unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 95 RON may be used with no

detriment to engine durability or driveability.

Model FA20

Type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-

stroke gasoline

Bore and stroke 86.0  86.0 mm (3.39 3.39 in.)

Displacement 1998 cm

(121.93 cu.in.)

Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment

Fuel type

When you find these types of fuel label at the gas

station, use only the fuel with one of the following

labels.

EU area:

Unleaded gasoline conforming to European stan-

dard EN228 only

Except EU area:

Unleaded gasoline only

Research octane num-

ber 98 or higher*

Fuel tank capacity

(Reference) 50 L (13.2 gal., 11.0 Imp. gal.)

500

6-1. Specifications

86_EE (OM18089E)

Lubrication system

*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing

the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes,

and check the oil level on the dipstick.

■Engine oil selection

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Toyota rec-

ommends the use of approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil”. Another

motor oil of matching quality can also be used.

Oil grade:

0W-20 and 5W-30:

API grade SL “Energy-Conserving”, SM “Energy-Conserving”, SN

“Resource-Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Oil capacity

(Drain and refill 

reference*)

Without filter

With filter

5.2 L (5.5 qt., 4.6 Imp. qt.)

5.4 L (5.7 qt., 4.8 Imp. qt.)

501

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

86_EE (OM18089E)

Recommended viscosity (SAE):

SAE 0W-20 is filled into your

Toyota vehicle at manufacturing,

and the best choice for good fuel

economy and good starting in

cold weather.

If SAE 0W-20 oil is not available,

SAE 5W-30 oil may be used.

However, it should be replaced

with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil

change.

Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):

• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows

cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier

starting of the engine in cold weather.

• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when

the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a

higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high

speeds, or under extreme load conditions.

Temperature range anticipated before

next oil change

Preferred

502

6-1. Specifications

86_EE (OM18089E)

How to read oil container labels:

Either or both API registered marks are added to some oil containers

to help you select the oil you should use.

API Service Symbol

Top portion: The oil quality desig-

nation by API (American Petro-

leum Institute) (SN)

Center portion: The SAE viscosity

grade (SAE 0W-20)

Lower portion: “Resource-

Conserving” means that the oil

has fuel saving and

environmental protection.

ILSAC Certification Mark

The ILSAC (International Lubri-

cant Specification Advisory Com-

mittee) Certification Mark is

displayed on the front of the con-

tainer.

503

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

86_EE (OM18089E)

Cooling system

Ignition system

Capacity

Vehicles with an automatic transmission

7.5 L (7.9 qt., 6.6 Imp. qt.)

Vehicles with a manual transmission

7.2 L (7.6 qt., 6.3 Imp. qt.)

Coolant type

Use either of the following.

• “TOYOTA Genuine 50/50 Pre-mixed Super Long

Life Coolant BLUE”

• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-

silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate

coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technol-

ogy

Do not use plain water alone.

Spark plug

Make

Gap

DENSO ZXE27HBR8

0.8 mm (0.031 in.)

NOTICE

■Iridium-tipped spark plugs

Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gap when tuning engine.

504

6-1. Specifications

86_EE (OM18089E)

Electrical system

Differential

*: Your Toyota vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” at the

factory. Use Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an

equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please con-

tact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional for further details.

Battery

Specific gravity reading at

20C (68F):

1.250  1.290 Fully charged

1.160  1.200 Half charged

1.060  1.100 Discharged

Charging rates

Quick charge

Slow charge

15 A max.

5 A max.

Oil capacity (Reference) 1.15 L (1.22 qt., 1.01 Imp. qt.)

Oil type and viscosity*

Without LSD

• Toyota Genuine Differential Gear

Oil LT

• Other gear oil that meets API GL-5

and SAE 75W-85

With LSD

• Toyota Genuine Differential Gear

Oil LX

• Other LSD gear oil that meets API

GL-5 and SAE 75W-85

505

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

86_EE (OM18089E)

Automatic transmission

*: The fluid capacity is provided as a reference.

If replacement is necessary, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

NOTICE

■Differential gear oil

Using a differential gear oil other than “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil”

may cause occurrences of rattling noises and vibrations while idling and

poor fuel consumption.

Never use different brands together.

Fluid capacity* 7.5 L (7.9 qt., 6.6 Imp. qt.)

Fluid type TOYOTA Genuine ATF WS

NOTICE

Using automatic transmission fluid other than “TOYOTA Genuine ATF WS”

may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accom-

panied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission of your

vehicle.

506

6-1. Specifications

86_EE (OM18089E)

Manual transmission

*: The recommended oil grade is API GL-3. However, API GL-4 can also be

used.

Clutch

Gear oil capacity (Reference) 2.2 L (2.3 qt., 1.9 Imp. qt.)

Gear oil type and viscosity

Use either of the following:

• “TOYOTA Genuine MG Gear Oil special

II”

• Other gear oil that meets API GL-3* and

SAE 75W-90 specifications

NOTICE

■Manual transmission gear oil

Using a manual transmission gear oil other than “TOYOTA Genuine MG

Gear Oil special II” may cause occurrences of rattling noises while idling and

poor fuel consumption.

Never use different brands together.

Pedal free play 5  15 mm (0.2  0.6 in.)

Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or

SAE J1704 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 4

507

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

86_EE (OM18089E)

Brakes

: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 490 N (50 kgf,

110 lbf) while the engine is running.

: Parking brake lever travel when pulled up with a force of 200 N (20.4 kgf,

45.0 lbf).

Steering

Tires and wheels

Pedal clearance*

55.0 mm (2.16 in.) min.

Pedal free play 0.5  2.7 mm (0.020  0.106 in.)

Parking brake lever travel*

7  8 clicks

Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or

SAE J1704 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 4

Free play Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)

Tire size 205/55R16 91V, 215/45R17 87W,

T135/80D16 101M

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire

inflation pressure)

240 kPa (2.4 kgf/cm

or bar, 35 psi)

Tire inflation pressure

(compact spare)

(Recommended cold tire

inflation pressure)

420 kPa (4.2 kgf/cm

or bar, 60 psi)

Wheel size 16  6 1/2 J, 17  7 J, 177 1/2 J,

16  4 T (compact spare)

Wheel nut torque 120 N•m (12.2 kgf•m, 89 ft•lbf)

508

6-1. Specifications

86_EE (OM18089E)

Light bulbs

A: Wedge base bulbs (clear) B: Wedge base bulbs (amber)

C: Double end bulbs

Light Bulbs WType

Exterior

Back-up lights 16 A

Rear fog lights 21 A

License plate lights 5 A

Side turn signal lights 5 B

Interior

Vanity lights (if equipped) 2 C

Interior light 10 C

Door courtesy lights (if equipped) 5 B

Trunk light 5 B

509

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

86_EE (OM18089E)

Fuel information

■Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline

To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Toyota has a fuel tank opening that

only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.

■If your engine knocks

●Consult any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly quali-

fied and equipped professional.

●You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while acceler-

ating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

When you find these types of fuel label at the gas station, use only

the fuel with one of the following labels.

The engine is designed to operate at maximum performance using

unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 98 or higher. If 98 RON

fuel is not readily available in your area, unleaded gasoline with an

octane rating of 95 RON may be used with no detriment to engine

durability or driveability. However, you may notice a slight decrease

in maximum engine performance and you may hear some knocking

(pinking) of an engine while using 95 RON fuel. Use of 95 RON fuel

will not affect your warranty coverage.

510

6-1. Specifications

86_EE (OM18089E)

NOTICE

■Notice on fuel quality

●Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used the engine will be

damaged.

●Do not use leaded gasoline.

Leaded gasoline will cause the three-way catalytic converter to lose its

effectiveness and the emission control system to function improperly.

●Do not use the methanol blended gasoline such as M15, M85, M100.

The use of gasoline containing methanol may cause engine damage or

failure.

●EU area: Bioethanol fuel sold under names such as “E50” or “E85” and

fuel containing a large amount of ethanol should not be used. The use of

these fuels will damage the vehicle's fuel system. In case of any doubt,

ask any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

●Except EU area: Bioethanol fuel sold under names such as “E50” or “E85”

and fuel containing a large amount of ethanol should not be used. Your

vehicle can use gasoline mixed with 10% max ethanol. The use of fuel

with more than 10% ethanol content (E10) will damage the vehicle’s fuel

system. You must ensure that refueling is carried out only from a source

where fuel specification and quality can be guaranteed. In case of any

doubt, ask any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly quali-

fied and equipped professional.

511

Vehicle specifications

86_EE (OM18089E)

6-2. Customization

Customizable features

Item Function Default setting Customized

setting

Smart entry

& start sys-

tem

(



P. 35)

Smart entry & start sys-

tem On Off

Operation signal

(Emergency flashers) On Off

Number of permissible

times of continuous

smart lock

Twice Unlimited

Wireless

remote con-

trol

(



P. 62)

Time elapsed before

automatic door lock

function is activated if

door is not opened after

being unlocked

30 seconds

60 seconds

120 seconds

Operation signal

(Emergency flashers) On Off

Door lock buzzer

(vehicles with a smart

entry & start system)

On Off

Trunk unlocking func-

tion On Off

Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be per-

sonalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences

requires specialized equipment and may be performed by any autho-

rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions

being customized. Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional.

512

6-2. Customization

86_EE (OM18089E)

Wireless

remote con-

trol

(



P. 62)

Trunk unlocking opera-

tion

Push and hold

(short)

Push and hold

(long)

One short push

Two short

pushes

Emergency

brake signal

(



P. 270)

Operation signal

(Emergency flashers) On Off

Automatic

light control

system

(P. 255)

Light sensor sensitivity ±0% -40% to +40%

Lights

(



P. 255)

Time that the low beam

headlights are on when

the vehicle is parked

30 seconds

60 seconds

90 seconds

120 seconds

Rear window

defogger

(



P. 306)

Time elapsed before

the rear window defog-

ger turn off (vehicles

with an automatic air

conditioning system)

15 minutes Continue

Illumination

(



P. 310)

Time elapsed before

lights turn off 15 seconds 7.5 seconds

30 seconds

Operation when the

doors are unlocked On Off

Operation after the

engine switch is turned

off

On Off

Interior light illumination

upon approach (vehi-

cles with a smart entry

& start system)

On Off

Interior light illumination On Off

Item Function Default setting Customized

setting

Index

513

86_EE (OM18089E)

Abbreviation list .......................514

Alphabetical index....................515

What to do if... ..........................525

514

86_EE (OM18089E)

Abbreviation list

Abbreviation/Acronym list

ABBREVIATIONS MEANING

ABS Anti-lock Brake System

ACC Accessory

AI-SHIFT Artificial Intelligence Shift

CRS Child Restraint System

DISP Display

ECU Electronic Control Unit

EDR Event Data Recorder

ELR Emergency Locking Retractor

EPS Electric Power Steering

LED Light Emitting Diode

LSD Limited Slip Differential

SRS Supplemental Restraint System

TPMS Tire Pressure Warning System

TRC Traction Control

VIN Vehicle Identification Number

VSC Vehicle Stability Control

515

86_EE (OM18089E)

Alphabetical index

A/C.....................................290, 298

ABS ...........................................270

Air conditioning filter ..............381

Air conditioning system

Air conditioning filter..............381

Automatic air conditioning

system ................................298

Manual air conditioning

system ................................290

Airbags

Airbag manual on/off

system ................................180

Airbag operating

conditions ...................140, 146

Airbag precautions for

your child ............................152

Airbag warning light ..............421

Curtain shield airbag

operating conditions ...........146

Curtain shield airbag

precautions.........................152

General airbag precautions...152

Locations of airbags..............131

Modification and

disposal of airbags..............157

Proper driving posture... 129, 152

Side airbag operating

conditions ...........................146

Side airbag precautions ........152

Side and curtain shield

airbags operating

conditions ...........................146

Side and curtain shield

airbags precautions ............152

SRS airbags..........................131

Anti-lock brake system ........... 270

Ashtray ..................................... 320

Audio input...............................308

Audio system

Audio input............................ 308

AUX port ............................... 308

Portable music player ........... 308

Steering wheel audio

switches.............................. 309

USB port ............................... 308

Automatic air conditioning

system.................................... 298

Automatic headlight

leveling system ..................... 258

Automatic light

control system....................... 255

Automatic transmission

Automatic transmission......... 210

If the shift lever cannot be

shifted from P ..................... 477

Manual mode........................ 213

Mode select switch ............... 212

Paddle shift levers ................ 213

AUX port ................................... 308

Auxiliary box ............................ 328

516

Alphabetical index

86_EE (OM18089E)

Back-up lights

Replacing light bulbs............. 396

Wattage.................................508

Battery

Checking...............................359

If the vehicle has a

discharged battery..............483

Preparing and checking

before winter.......................283

Bottle holders...........................314

Brake

Parking brake........................222

Brake assist..............................270

Break-in tips.............................187

Brightness control

Instrument panel light

control.................................226

Care

Alcantara

............................ 340

Aluminum wheels.................. 333

Exterior ................................. 332

Interior................................... 336

Seat belts.............................. 337

Chains....................................... 283

Child restraint system

Baby seats, definition............ 161

Baby seats, installation......... 170

Child seats, definition............ 161

Child seats, installation......... 170

Installing CRS with ISOFIX

rigid anchor......................... 174

Installing CRS with

seat belts............................ 171

Installing CRS with

top straps............................ 175

Junior seats, definition.......... 161

Junior seats, installation ....... 170

Child safety

Airbag precautions................ 152

Battery precautions....... 362, 486

Child restraint system ........... 161

How your child should

wear the seat belt................. 95

Installing child restraints ....... 170

Power window lock switch .... 105

Power window precautions... 108

Removed key battery

precautions......................... 387

Seat belt guide........................ 94

Seat belt precautions..............96

Seat heater precautions........ 323

Trunk precautions................... 82

517

Alphabetical index

86_EE (OM18089E)

Cleaning

Alcantara

.............................340

Aluminum wheels..................333

Exterior..................................332

Interior...................................336

Seat belts..............................337

Clock ......................................... 319

Condenser ................................358

Console tray .............................315

Coolant

Capacity ................................ 503

Checking...............................356

Cooling system

Engine overheating...............488

Cruise control ..........................265

Cup holders..............................315

Curtain airbags ........................131

Customizable features ............511

Daytime running light

system.................................... 257

Defogger

Rear window ......................... 306

Side mirror ............................ 306

Dimensions .............................. 496

Display

Drive information................... 242

Multi-information

display ........................ 234, 239

Trip information............. 237, 240

Warning messages............... 428

Do-it-yourself maintenance .... 345

Door courtesy lights

Door courtesy lights.............. 310

Wattage ................................ 508

Doors

Door lock..................... 35, 62, 77

Door windows ....................... 105

Double locking system.......... 127

Side mirrors .......................... 102

Drive information.....................242

Driver's seat belt

reminder light ........................ 423

Driving

Break-in tips.......................... 187

Correct posture..................... 129

Procedures ........................... 184

Winter drive tips.................... 283

518

Alphabetical index

86_EE (OM18089E)

Electric power steering ...........270

Electronic key

If the electronic key does

not operate properly ...........479

Emergency brake signal .........270

Emergency flashers

Switch ...................................408

Emergency, in case of

If the electronic key does

not operate properly ...........479

If the engine will not start ......474

If the shift lever cannot

be shifted from P ................477

If the vehicle has a

discharged battery..............483

If the warning buzzer

sounds ................................419

If the warning light

turns on...............................419

If the warning message

is displayed.........................428

If you have a flat tire .....446, 462

If you lose your keys .............478

If you think something is

wrong..................................417

If your vehicle becomes

stuck ...................................491

If your vehicle has to be

stopped in an

emergency..........................493

If your vehicle needs to

be towed.............................409

If your vehicle overheats .......488

Engine

Compartment........................ 352

Engine switch................ 198, 207

Hood ..................................... 348

How to start the

engine......................... 198, 207

Identification number ............ 497

If the engine will not start...... 474

Ignition switch ............... 198, 207

Overheating .......................... 488

Engine coolant

Capacity................................ 503

Checking............................... 356

Engine coolant temperature

gauge...................................... 224

Engine immobilizer system .... 113

Engine oil

Capacity................................ 500

Checking............................... 353

Preparing and checking

before winter....................... 283

Engine switch .................. 198, 207

Engine switch light.................. 310

EPS ........................................... 270

Event data recorder................... 26

519

Alphabetical index

86_EE (OM18089E)

Floor mat ..................................325

Fluid

Washer..................................363

Fog lights

Switch ...................................261

Front fog lights

Switch ...................................261

Front passenger's seat belt

reminder light ........................423

Front position lights

Switch ...................................255

Front seats

Adjustment..............................86

Front turn signal lights

Switch ...................................221

Fuel

Capacity ................................ 499

Fuel gauge............................224

Fuel pump shut off system....418

Gas station information.........528

Information............................509

Refueling...............................109

Fuel door ..................................109

Fuel filler door..........................109

Fuel pump shut off system .....418

Fuses ........................................388

Gauges ..................................... 224

Glove box ................................. 313

Hazard lights

Emergency brake signal ....... 270

Switch ................................... 408

Head restraints

Adjusting ................................ 91

Headlight cleaner..................... 262

Headlights

Automatic headlight

leveling ............................... 258

Switch ................................... 255

Heaters

Seat heaters ......................... 323

Side mirror ............................ 306

Hill start assist control............ 277

Hood ......................................... 348

Horn .......................................... 223

520

Alphabetical index

86_EE (OM18089E)

Identification

Engine................................... 497

Vehicle ..................................497

Ignition switch..................198, 207

Ignition switch light

Ignition switch light................310

Illuminated entry system.........310

Immobilizer system .................113

Indicator lights.........................228

Inside rear view mirror ............ 101

Interior light

Interior light ........................... 311

Switch ...................................311

Wattage.................................508

Jack

Positioning a floor jack..........350

Vehicle-equipped

jack .............................446, 462

Jack handle ......................446, 462

Jam protection function

Power windows.....................106

Keyless entry .............................62

Keys

Electronic key..........................32

Engine switch................ 198, 207

If you lose your keys .............478

If your electronic key

battery is discharged ..........479

Key number.............................32

Keyless entry ..........................62

Keys........................................32

Mechanical key .......................33

Wireless remote control key.... 62

Language (multi-information

display)................................... 249

License plate lights

Replacing light bulbs............. 396

Wattage ................................ 508

Light bulbs

Replacing.............................. 396

Wattage ................................ 508

Lights

Door courtesy lights.............. 310

Emergency flasher switch.....408

Engine switch light................310

Fog light switch ..................... 261

Hazard light switch................ 408

Headlights switch.................. 255

Interior light switch ................ 311

Replacing light bulbs............. 396

Trunk light............................... 81

Turn signal lever ................... 221

Vanity lights .......................... 318

Wattage ................................ 508

Maintenance

Do-it-yourself maintenance... 345

Maintenance data ................. 496

Maintenance requirements ... 342

Manual air conditioning

system.................................... 290

Manual transmission...............217

Meter

Indicators .............................. 228

Instrument panel

light control ......................... 226

Meters................................... 224

Multi-information

display ........................ 234, 239

Settings................................. 249

Warning lights....................... 419

Warning messages............... 428

521

Alphabetical index

86_EE (OM18089E)

Mirrors

Inside rear view mirror ..........101

Side mirror heater .................306

Side mirrors...........................102

Vanity mirrors........................318

Multi-information display

Drive information...................242

G-force display......................244

Language..............................249

Multi-information

display ........................234, 239

Settings.................................249

Trip information.............235, 240

Warning messages ...............428

Odometer..................................224

Oil

Engine oil ..............................353

Opener

Fuel filler door .......................109

Hood .....................................348

Trunk.......................................80

Outside rear view mirrors

Adjusting and folding.............102

Outside temperature

display............................237, 252

Overheating, Engine................488

Paddle shift levers ...................213

Parking brake ...........................222

Power outlets ...........................321

Power windows........................105

Radiator .................................... 358

Rear fog lights

Replacing light bulbs............. 396

Switch ................................... 261

Wattage ................................ 508

Rear seats .................................. 89

Rear turn signal lights

Switch ................................... 221

Rear view mirror

Inside rear view mirror .......... 101

Outside rear view mirrors...... 102

Rear window defogger ............ 306

Replacing

Fuses.................................... 388

Key battery............................384

Light bulbs ............................ 396

Tires...................................... 462

REV indicator ........................... 249

Seat belts

Adjusting the seat belt ............93

Child restraint system

installation .......................... 170

Cleaning and maintaining

the seat belts ...................... 337

Emergency Locking

Retractor (ELR) .................... 95

How to wear your seat belt ..... 93

How your child should

wear the seat belt................. 95

Pregnant women,

proper seat belt use.............. 97

Reminder light....................... 423

Seat belt guide........................ 94

Seat belt pretensioners........... 94

522

Alphabetical index

86_EE (OM18089E)

Seat heaters .............................323

Seats

Adjustment..............................86

Adjustment precautions ..........88

Child seats/child restraint

system installation ..............170

Cleaning................................336

Head restraint .........................91

Properly sitting in the seat.....129

Seat heaters..........................323

Service reminder

indicators ..............................228

Shift lever

Automatic transmission.........210

If the shift lever cannot

be shifted from P ................477

Manual transmission.............217

Shift lock system .....................477

Side airbags ............................ 131

Side mirror

Adjusting and folding.............102

Side turn signal lights

Replacing light bulbs............. 396

Switch ...................................221

Wattage.................................508

Smart entry & start system

Antenna location .....................37

Entry function..........................35

Starting the engine................198

Spare tire

Inflation pressure ..................507

Storage location....................462

Spark plug ................................503

Specifications ..........................496

Speedometer ............................224

Steering

Column lock release .............100

Steering wheel

Adjustment............................ 100

Audio switches...................... 309

Meter control switches .......... 240

Storage feature ........................ 312

Stuck

If your vehicle becomes

stuck ................................... 491

Sun visors ................................ 317

Switch

Airbag manual on/off............. 180

Audio remote control

switches.............................. 309

“DISP” switch........................ 237

Driving pattern selector

switch ................................. 212

Emergency flasher switch.....408

Engine switch................ 198, 207

Fog light switch ..................... 261

Hazard light switch................ 408

Ignition switch ............... 198, 207

Light switches ....................... 255

Meter control switches .......... 240

“ODO/TRIP” switch ....... 236, 240

Power door lock switch ...........78

Power window switch............ 105

“TRACK” switch .................... 272

Transmission shift

switches...................... 213, 215

VSC/TRC off switch ...... 271, 272

Window lock switch............... 105

Wiper and washer switch...... 262

523

Alphabetical index

86_EE (OM18089E)

Tachometer

Tachometer...........................224

Tail lights

Switch ...................................255

Theft deterrent system

Double locking system ..........127

Engine immobilizer system ...113

Tire inflation pressure.............507

Tires

Chains...................................283

Checking...............................365

Emergency tire puncture

repair kit..............................446

If you have a flat tire......446, 462

Inflation pressure ..................376

Replacing..............................462

Rotating tires.........................365

Size.......................................507

Snow tires .............................283

Spare tire .............................. 462

Tire pressure warning

system ........................365, 423

Tools .................................446, 462

Towing

Emergency towing ................409

“TRACK” mode ........................272

Traction control .......................270

Transmission shift

switches .........................213, 215

TRC ........................................... 270

Trip meter................................. 224

Trunk

Opener.................................... 80

Trunk light

Wattage ................................ 508

Turn signal lights

Replacing light bulbs............. 396

Switch ................................... 221

Wattage ................................ 508

USB port ................................... 308

Vanity lights

Vanity lights .......................... 318

Wattage ................................ 508

Vanity mirrors .......................... 318

Vehicle identification

number ................................... 497

Vehicle stability control .......... 270

VSC ........................................... 270

Warning buzzers

Electric power steering ......... 421

Seat belt reminder ................ 423

Smart entry & start

system........................ 430, 435

524

Alphabetical index

86_EE (OM18089E)

Warning lights

Anti-lock brake system..........421

Automatic headlight

leveling system...................421

Automatic transmission

fluid temperature

warning light .......................423

Brake assist system..............421

Brake system ........................419

Charging system...................420

Cruise control

indicator light ......................421

Electric power steering

system warning light...........421

Electronic engine control

system ................................421

Engine oil pressure ...............420

High engine coolant

temperature ........................420

LED headlight .......................421

Low fuel level ........................423

Low tire pressure ..................423

Malfunction indicator lamp ....421

Master warning light..............423

Open door.............................423

Pretensioners........................421

Seat belt reminder light.........423

Slip indicator light..................421

Smart entry & start

system ........................430, 435

SRS airbags..........................421

Tire pressure warning

system ................................423

Warning messages.................. 428

Washer

Checking............................... 363

Preparing and checking

before winter....................... 283

Switch ................................... 262

Washing and waxing ............... 332

Wheels ...................................... 378

Window glasses ...................... 105

Window lock switch ................ 105

Windows

Power windows..................... 105

Rear window defogger.......... 306

Washer ................................. 262

Windshield wipers ................... 262

Winter driving tips................... 283

Wireless remote control key

Locking/Unlocking................... 62

Replacing the battery............ 384

Wireless remote control key ... 62

525

86_EE (OM18089E)

What to do if...

A tire punctures

P. 446

P. 462

If you have a flat tire

The engine does not start

P. 474

If the engine will not start

P. 11 3

Engine immobilizer system

P. 483

If the battery is discharged

The shift lever cannot be

moved out

P. 477

If the shift lever cannot be shifted

from P

The

engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone (vehi-

cles with a monochrome multi-information display)

The high engine coolant temperature warning light flashes or

illuminates (vehicles with a color multi-information display)

Steam can be seen coming

from under the hood

P. 488

If your vehicle overheats

The key is lost

P. 478

If you lose your keys

The battery runs out

P. 483

If the battery is discharged

The doors cannot be locked

P. 77

Doors

The vehicle is stuck in mud

or sand

P. 491

If the vehicle becomes stuck

A warning light or indicator

light comes on

P. 419

If a warning light turns on or a

warning buzzer sounds...

526

What to do if...

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Instrument cluster

■Center panel

Vehicles with a monochrome multi-information display

Vehicles with a color multi-information display

527

What to do if...

86_EE (OM18089E)

■Warning lights

P. 419 P. 421

P. 420 P. 421

P. 420 P. 423

P. 421 P. 423

P. 430, 435

P. 423

P. 421 P. 423

: The light flashes or illuminates in red to indicate a malfunction.

: The light comes on in yellow to indicate a malfunction.

Brake system warning

light

Automatic headlight leveling sys-

tem warning light

Charging system warn-

ing light

LED headlight warning

light

Low engine oil pressure

warning light

Cruise control indicator

light

High engine coolant temperature

warning light

Open door warning light

Malfunction indicator

lamp

Low fuel level warning

light

SRS warning light

Driver’s seat belt

reminder light

ABS warning light

Front passenger’s seat belt

reminder light

Electric power steering

warning light

Tire pressure warning

light

Smart entry & start system

indicator light

Automatic transmission fluid tem-

perature warning light

Slip indicator

Master warning light

528

86_EE (OM18089E)

GAS STATION INFORMATION

Auxiliary catch lever

P. 348

Trunk opener

P. 8 0

Hood lock release lever

P. 348

Fuel filler door

P. 109

Tire inflation pressure

P. 507

Fuel filler door opener

P. 1 0 9

Fuel tank capacity

(Reference) 50 L (13.2 gal., 11.0 Imp. gal.)

Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only

P. 109, 499

Cold tire inflation

pressure P. 507

Engine oil capacity

(Drain and refill 

reference)

L (qt., Imp. qt.)

Without filter 5.2 (5.5

4.6

)

With filter 5.4 (5.7, 4.8)

Engine oil type P. 500

Toyota GT86 2017 Handleiding

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Misbruik melden

Product:

Spelregels forum

Abonneren

Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Andere handleiding(en) van Toyota GT86 2017

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Info